Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
V100R003C00
02
Date
2011-01-20
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Version
V100R003C00
iManager U2000
V100R003C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
iii
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Italic
Courier New
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
iv
Convention
Description
Boldface
Italic
[]
{ x | y | ... }
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Convention
Description
[ x | y | ... ]
{ x | y | ... }*
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
>
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Section
Description
Entire document
Entire document
vi
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Configuration Modes.......................................................................................................................................1-6
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Air Flow..........................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3 CSTA.............................................................................................................................................................3-10
3.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-11
3.3.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-11
3.3.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-15
3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-17
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-27
3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-29
3.3.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-30
3.3.8 Types of SFP Modules.........................................................................................................................3-30
3.3.9 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-30
3.3.10 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-31
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.....................................................................................................................................3-34
3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-35
3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-35
3.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-43
3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-46
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-60
3.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-62
3.4.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-63
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
vii
Contents
3.5 CSHD............................................................................................................................................................3-69
3.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-70
3.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-70
3.5.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-77
3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-81
3.5.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-94
3.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-95
3.5.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-96
3.5.8 Types of SFP Modules.........................................................................................................................3-96
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-96
3.5.10 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-97
3.6 IF1...............................................................................................................................................................3-101
3.6.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-101
3.6.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-101
3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-103
3.6.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-108
3.6.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-110
3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-110
3.6.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-111
3.7 IFU2............................................................................................................................................................3-113
3.7.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-113
3.7.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-113
3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-116
3.7.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-120
3.7.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-122
3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-122
3.7.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-123
3.8 IFX2............................................................................................................................................................3-125
3.8.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-126
3.8.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-126
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-128
3.8.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-132
3.8.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-134
3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-135
3.8.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-136
3.9 ISU2............................................................................................................................................................3-138
3.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-138
3.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-138
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-141
viii
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Contents
ix
Contents
3.15 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-210
3.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-211
3.15.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-211
3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-212
3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-214
3.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-218
3.15.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-218
3.15.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-219
3.15.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-219
3.16 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-220
3.16.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-220
3.16.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-220
3.16.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-221
3.16.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-222
3.16.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-223
3.16.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-224
3.17 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-224
3.17.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-224
3.17.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-224
3.17.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-225
3.17.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-226
3.17.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-227
3.17.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-227
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-6
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-6
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................5-7
5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-8
5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.5 Fiber Jumper..................................................................................................................................................5-10
x
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Contents
5.6 E1 Cables.......................................................................................................................................................5-12
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment..................................................................................5-12
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel....................................................................................................5-16
5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-18
5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-19
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................A-2
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................A-2
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...............................................................................................A-2
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation.................................................................................................A-7
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs........................................................................A-9
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.........................................................................A-10
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time...............................................A-13
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...............................................................A-14
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.................................................................................A-15
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs...........................................A-16
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management...................................................................................A-17
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting......................................................A-18
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration...........................................A-19
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management..........A-21
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC.....................................A-23
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management.......................................................................A-24
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management...........................A-25
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.............A-27
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.......................A-28
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP...................................................................A-32
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting....................................................................................A-33
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter.........................................A-33
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table............................................................A-34
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel................................................................A-35
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management.........................................A-39
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..............................................................A-40
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting.......................................................A-41
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control........................................................A-41
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control.........................................................................................A-42
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management..................................................................................A-43
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management...............................................................................A-43
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation................................................................A-44
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..................................................................................A-46
A.2 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-47
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-48
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-52
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
xi
Contents
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Contents
xiii
Contents
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoPDH Plane.........................................A-303
A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services......................................................................................................A-303
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation...............................................................A-304
A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services....A-307
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service..............................................................................A-311
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE
802.1d/802.1q Bridge.................................................................................................................................A-314
A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN
Service........................................................................................................................................................A-317
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service.............................................................................A-322
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation.............................................................A-327
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries...........................................A-328
A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols....................................................................................................A-329
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling...........................................................A-330
A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters..........................................................A-331
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters..............................................................A-332
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information..........................................A-334
A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information..............................................A-335
A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute..................................................A-336
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling........................................................A-337
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries....A-338
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries........A-339
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs.....................................A-340
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................A-342
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT.................A-343
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.........A-344
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation........................................................................A-345
A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................A-346
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs...............................................A-347
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs...............................................A-347
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs................................................A-348
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB......................................................A-350
xiv
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Contents
xv
Contents
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Contents
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
xvii
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910..................................................1-2
Figure 1-2 IDU 910..............................................................................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-4 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910........................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 910 chassis..........................................................................................................2-3
Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 910 labels..........................................................................................................2-5
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an IFU2 board.............................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA............................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-16
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA.................................................................................................................. 3-18
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector.....................................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port........................................... 3-21
Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module.......................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-10 Front view of an Anea 96 connector...............................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-11 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.....................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-12 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-29
Figure 3-13 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA...........................................................................3-30
Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram ..............................................................................................................3-43
Figure 3-15 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-45
Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHA................................................................................................................3-47
Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHB................................................................................................................3-47
Figure 3-18 Front panel of the CSHC................................................................................................................3-47
Figure 3-19 Front view of the RJ45 connector...................................................................................................3-51
Figure 3-20 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port......................................... 3-52
Figure 3-21 Ports of the SFP optical module.....................................................................................................3-57
Figure 3-22 Front view of an Anea 96 connector...............................................................................................3-58
Figure 3-23 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.....................................................................................3-61
Figure 3-24 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis.....................................................................3-62
Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA...........................................................................3-62
Figure 3-26 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB...........................................................................3-63
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
xix
Figures
Figure 3-27 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC...........................................................................3-63
Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the CSHD.........................................................................................3-78
Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-79
Figure 3-30 Front panel of the CSHD................................................................................................................3-82
Figure 3-31 Front view of the RJ45 connector...................................................................................................3-84
Figure 3-32 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port.........................................3-86
Figure 3-33 Ports of the SFP optical module.....................................................................................................3-90
Figure 3-34 Front view of an Anea 96 connector...............................................................................................3-92
Figure 3-35 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.....................................................................................3-94
Figure 3-36 Slot for the CSHD in the IDU chassis............................................................................................3-96
Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHD...........................................................................3-96
Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram of the IF1............................................................................................3-103
Figure 3-39 Front panel of the IF1...................................................................................................................3-108
Figure 3-40 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis..............................................................................................3-110
Figure 3-41 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS............................................................................................3-110
Figure 3-42 Functional block diagram of the IFU2.........................................................................................3-117
Figure 3-43 Front panel of the IFU2................................................................................................................3-120
Figure 3-44 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-122
Figure 3-45 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-122
Figure 3-46 Functional block diagram of the IFX2.........................................................................................3-129
Figure 3-47 Front panel of the IFX2................................................................................................................3-132
Figure 3-48 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-135
Figure 3-49 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2...........................................................................3-135
Figure 3-50 Functional block diagram of the ISU2.........................................................................................3-142
Figure 3-51 Front panel of the ISU2................................................................................................................3-145
Figure 3-52 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-147
Figure 3-53 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-147
Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the ISX2.........................................................................................3-156
Figure 3-55 Front panel of the ISX2................................................................................................................3-159
Figure 3-56 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-162
Figure 3-57 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-162
Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram.............................................................................................................3-170
Figure 3-59 Front panel of the EM6T..............................................................................................................3-172
Figure 3-60 Front panel of the EM6F..............................................................................................................3-173
Figure 3-61 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-175
Figure 3-62 Ports of the SFP optical module...................................................................................................3-177
Figure 3-63 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-177
Figure 3-64 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS............................................................................3-177
Figure 3-65 Functional block diagram of the EFP8.........................................................................................3-185
Figure 3-66 Front panel of the EFP8................................................................................................................3-187
Figure 3-67 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-189
Figure 3-68 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-190
xx
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Figures
xxi
Figures
xxii
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910.................................................................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910.............................................................................1-4
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910..........................................................................1-5
Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910.........................................................................................1-7
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3
Table 3-1 List of the IDU boards..........................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CSTA supports.................................................................................3-11
Table 3-3 SDH service functions that the CSTA supports.................................................................................3-13
Table 3-4 PDH service functions that the CSTA supports.................................................................................3-14
Table 3-5 Status explanation for indicators on the CSTA..................................................................................3-18
Table 3-6 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.............................................3-19
Table 3-7 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port...........................................................................................3-20
Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the EXT port......................................................................................................3-21
Table 3-9 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector..............................................................3-21
Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port...........................................................................................3-22
Table 3-11 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port..................................................................................................3-23
Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.....................................................................................3-24
Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the PHONE port...............................................................................................3-24
Table 3-14 Buttons.............................................................................................................................................3-25
Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSTA.................................................................................3-25
Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.....................................................................................3-26
Table 3-17 Setting DIP switches........................................................................................................................3-28
Table 3-18 Board feature code of the CSTA......................................................................................................3-30
Table 3-19 Types of SFP modules.....................................................................................................................3-30
Table 3-20 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-31
Table 3-21 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-32
Table 3-22 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-32
Table 3-23 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-32
Table 3-24 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-33
Table 3-25 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-33
Table 3-26 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-33
Table 3-27 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-34
Table 3-28 Functions and features that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports.......................................................3-35
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
xxiii
Tables
xxiv
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Tables
Table 3-71 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports...........................................3-84
Table 3-72 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port.........................................................................................3-84
Table 3-73 Pin assignments for the EXT port....................................................................................................3-85
Table 3-74 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector............................................................3-85
Table 3-75 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.........................................................................................3-86
Table 3-76 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port..................................................................................................3-87
Table 3-77 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.....................................................................................3-88
Table 3-78 Pin assignment of the TEL/MON/TOD2 port..................................................................................3-88
Table 3-79 Buttons.............................................................................................................................................3-89
Table 3-80 Description of the service ports on the CSHD.................................................................................3-90
Table 3-81 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode....................................................................3-90
Table 3-82 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode...............................................................3-91
Table 3-83 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.....................................................................................3-92
Table 3-84 Setting DIP switches........................................................................................................................3-95
Table 3-85 Board feature code of the CSHD.....................................................................................................3-96
Table 3-86 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports............................................................................3-96
Table 3-87 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-98
Table 3-88 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-98
Table 3-89 FE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-98
Table 3-90 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-99
Table 3-91 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-99
Table 3-92 Synchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-100
Table 3-93 Asynchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-100
Table 3-94 Clock timing and synchronization performance............................................................................3-100
Table 3-95 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-101
Table 3-96 Functions and features that the IF1 supports..................................................................................3-102
Table 3-97 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1.....................................................................3-104
Table 3-98 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1...................................................................3-106
Table 3-99 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1..................................................................................3-108
Table 3-100 Description of the Ports ...............................................................................................................3-109
Table 3-101 Slot allocation ..............................................................................................................................3-110
Table 3-102 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)..........................................................................3-111
Table 3-103 IF performance.............................................................................................................................3-112
Table 3-104 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.............................................................3-112
Table 3-105 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-112
Table 3-106 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports.............................................................................3-113
Table 3-107 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports.......................................................................3-115
Table 3-108 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2................................................................3-117
Table 3-109 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2..............................................................3-119
Table 3-110 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2..............................................................................3-120
Table 3-111 Description of the Ports ...............................................................................................................3-121
Table 3-112 Slot allocation ..............................................................................................................................3-122
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
xxv
Tables
xxvi
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Tables
xxvii
Tables
xxviii
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Tables
xxix
Tables
xxx
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Tables
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
xxxi
1 Introduction
Introduction
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
1-1
1 Introduction
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 900 series products support the same IF boards and service interface boards.
The OptiX RTN 900 products provide several types of service interfaces and facilitate
installation and flexible configuration. It can provide a solution that is integrated with the TDM
microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It
supports the smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the
Hybrid microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution can evolve based on the service
changes that occur due to radio mobile network evolution. Thus, this solution can meet the
transmission requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G
networks.
FE
E1/
STM-1
E1
E1
FE
E1/
STM-1
E1
Regional TDM
Network
FE/GE
E1
FE/GE
Regional Packet
Network
FE/GE
E1
FE
FE
1-2
E1
MSTP
NodeB
BTS
RNC
BSC
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
1 Introduction
NOTE
l In the solution, the OptiX RTN 910 can be connected to the RNC and BSC directly or through the regional
backhaul network.
l The OptiX RTN 910 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the
regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM)
network or packet switching network (PSN).
l The OptiX RTN 910 supports the Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH) function, and therefore packet services
can be backhauled through a TDM network.
l The OptiX RTN 910 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology, and
therefore TDM and ATM services can be backhauled through a PSN.
l When the OptiX RTN 910 supports the microwaves in three directions or more, you can adopt the NE
cascading mode or use the OptiX RTN 950, which is more powerful.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 910
The IDU 910 is the indoor unit of an OptiX RTN 910 system. It accesses services, performs
services processing and IF processing, and provides system control and communication function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910.
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910
Item
Performance
Chassis height
1U
Pluggable
Supported
Number of microwave
directions
1 to 2
RF configuration mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
1-3
1 Introduction
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 900. It performs frequency conversion and
amplification of signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 series products can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band.
NOTE
Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz
frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910
Item
Description
Standard Power
ODU
ODU type
SP, SPA
HP
LP
Frequency band
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/38 GHz (SP
ODU)
6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/
15/18/23/26/28/32/3
8 GHz
7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (SPA ODU)
Microwave
modulation mode
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
(SP)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM (SPA)
1-4
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Item
1 Introduction
Description
Channel spacing
Standard Power
ODU
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
7/14/28/40/56 MHz
(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1
8/23/26/28/32/38
GHz)
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910
Item
Description
High Power ODU
ODU type
XMC-2
XMC-1
Frequency band
7/8/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz
7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz
Microwave modulation
mode
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/
64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
Channel spacing
7/14/28/56 MHz
(7/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz)
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and singlepolarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the
ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one
antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 shows the direct mounting
method.
1-5
1 Introduction
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarized
antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.
1-6
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
1 Introduction
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Configuration
Modes
Type of the
Control,
Switching,
and Timing
Board
Type of the IF
Board
Type of the
ODU
Main
Application
PDH
microwave
equipment
CSTA
IF1
Low capacity
for PDH ODU
Providing a
radio link whose
capacity is not
higher than
16xE1
SDH
microwave
equipment
CSTA
IF1
Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing a
1xSTM-1 SDH
radio link or a
high-capacity
PDH radio link
CSTA
ISU2/ISX2
Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing a
1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1 SDH
radio link
Hybrid/Packet
microwave
equipment
CSHA/CSHB/
CSHC/CSHD
IFU2/ISU2
Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing a
Hybrid/Packet
radio link
XPIC Hybrid/
Packet
microwave
equipment
CSHA/CSHB/
CSHC/CSHD
IFX2/ISU2
Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing a
Hybrid/Packet
radio link of the
super capacity
1-7
2 Chassis
Chassis
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
2-1
2 Chassis
On a wall
On a table
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
2 Chassis
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels
Label
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Label Name
Description
ESD protection
label
Grounding label
Indicates the
grounding position
of the IDU chassis.
2-3
2 Chassis
Label
Label Name
Description
High temperature
warning label
Instructs you to
read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
For details, see
Labels in 3.16.4
Front Panel.
/QUALIFICATION CARD
Qualification card
label
RoHS label
Product nameplate
label
Indicates the
product name and
certification.
HUAWEI
MADE IN CHINA
POWER RATING:
-48-60V;5A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
N 14036
2-4
MADE IN CHINA
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
2 Chassis
Label
Label Name
Description
Operation guidance
label
Instructs you to
slightly pull the
switch lever
outwards before
setting the switch
to the "I" or "O"
position.
PULL
Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 910.
Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 910 labels
OptiX RTN 910
/Q U A LIF IC A T IO N C A R D
POWER RATING:
-48-60V;5A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
H U AW E I
M A DE IN CH INA
N 14036
MADE IN CHINA
!
W A R N IN G
-48V O U T PU T
T U R N O FF P O W ER B EF O R E
D ISC O N N EC TIN G IF C AB LE
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
2-5
3 Boards
Boards
3-1
3 Boards
3.10 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.11 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two
GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The
GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP
modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on
the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
3.12 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
3.13 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.
3.14 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
3.15 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.16 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.
3.17 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.
3-2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an IFU2 board in an IDU 910 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an IFU2 board
Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Internal code
Board version
Board name
Board feature code
3-3
3 Boards
NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,
the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module
being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the
impedance of E1 ports.
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD)
NOTE
The EXT represents an extended slot, which can be inserted with various IF boards and interface boards.
Full
Spelling
CSTA
TDM
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1
3-4
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
CSHA
Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-5
3 Boards
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
CSHB
Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1
3-6
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
CSHC
Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-7
3 Boards
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
CSHD
Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1
ISU2
Universal IF
board
Slot 3/4
3-8
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
ISX2
Universal
XPIC IF
board
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 3/4
IF1
IFU2
SDH IF
board
Slot 3/4
Universal IF
board
Slot 3/4
IFX2
Universal
XPIC IF
board
Slot 3/4
SL1D
2xSTM-1
interface
board
Slot 3/4
EM6T
6 Port RJ45
Ethernet/
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Board
Slot 3/4
4 Port RJ45 +
2 Port SFP
Fast
Ethernet/
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Board
Slot 3/4
EM6F
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-9
3 Boards
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
EFP8
8-port RJ-45
FE EoPDH
processing
board with
the switching
function
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 3/4
16xE1
(smart)
tributary
board
Slot 3/4
32xE1
(smart)
tributary
board
Slot 3/4
SP3S
16xE1
tributary
board
Slot 3/4
SP3D
32xE1
tributary
board
Slot 3/4
TNC1PIU
Power board
Slot 5
TNC1FAN
Fan board
Slot 6
ML1
MD1
3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.3.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.
3.3.2 Functions and Features
The CSTA provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,
and clock processing functions. The CSTA provides PDH/SDH service ports, auxiliary ports,
and management ports.
3.3.3 Working Principle
The CSTA consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock
unit, service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.
3.3.4 Front Panel
3-10
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
There are indicators, service ports, management ports, auxiliary ports, buttons, and labels on the
front panel.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.
3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary
slots. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSTA, the function units are mapped into
specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the NMS.
3.3.7 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the CSTA indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
3.3.8 Types of SFP Modules
The STM-1 optical port on the CSTA board supports four types of SFP modules.
3.3.9 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.
3.3.10 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability,
performance of SDH optical ports, E1 ports, clocks, and auxiliary ports, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Board
Cross-connect
capacity
System control
and
communication
3-11
3 Boards
Clock
synchronization
at the physical
layer
Board
Provides the system clock and frame headers for
service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
The traced clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Clock at the air interface
Clock
protection
DCN
Auxiliary ports
and
management
ports
Ethernet NM
port
NM serial port
NE cascading
port
Orderwire
phone port
Asynchronous
data port
Synchronous
data port
External alarm
port
Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
Supported
OM
3-12
Outband DCN
The port shares the same port with the external time
port and its specifications comply with RS-485.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Detection of
indicators on the
other boards
Supported
Pluggable CF
card
Supported
Table 3-3 provides details about the SDH service functions that the CSTA supports.
Table 3-3 SDH service functions that the CSTA supports
Function and Feature
Board
Basic functions
Protection
Clock
Linear MSP
Supported
SNCP
Supported
Clock source
Each SDH line port provides one SDH line clock signal.
Clock
protection
DCN
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Outband DCN
3-13
3 Boards
Loopback
Board
Supports the following loopback types:
l Outloops at optical ports
l Inloops at optical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
l Inloops on VC-4 paths
Setting of the
on/off state of a
laser
Supported
Automatic laser
shutdown
(ALS) functiona
Supported
Detection and
query of SFP
optical module
information
Supported
Supported
NOTE
Table 3-4 provides details about the PDH service functions that the CSTA supports.
Table 3-4 PDH service functions that the CSTA supports
Function and Feature
Basic functions
3-14
Board
Receives and transmits E1 signals.
Port
specifications
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
16
Clock
Clock source
Clock
protection
E1 retiming
function
Supported
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
Loopback
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
SDH signal
E1 signal
processing unit
E1 signal
Backplane
VC-4
signal
STM-1 signal
processing unit
VC-4 signal
Cross-connect
unit
VC-4
signal
Control bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
System control
and
communication
NE cascading port
to other boards
unit
Monitoring signal
u nit
Asynchronous/
Synchronous data port
Clock signal
received from
the service unit
on the board
Clock signal
provided to
the other units
on the board
Power
-48 V1
supply
unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans
3-15
3 Boards
The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
SinkTDM
service unit
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
3-16
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-17
3 Boards
LOS1
LOS2
1
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
CSTA
STM-1
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
E1
1~16
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
1. Indicators
2. Buttons
5. E1 (1-16) ports
Indicators
Table 3-5 Status explanation for indicators on the CSTA
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
PROG
On (green)
3-18
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)
SYNC
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (red)
Off
On (red)
Off
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Port
Description
NMS/COM
EXT
NE cascading port
CLK/TOD
Connector Type
RJ45
3-19
3 Boards
Port
Description
Connector Type
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO
PHONE
NOTE
l The external clock port, external time port, outdoor cabinet monitoring port, and wayside E1 port share
one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes,
and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of
the preceding functions at one time.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit one orderwire byte. This port, however,
can transmit 64 kbit/s synchronous data or transparently transmit one orderwire byte at one time.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
NMS/COM
3-20
Pin
Signal
Not defined
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
EXT
Pin
Signal
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-9 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-9 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
Off
On or blinking
Off
ACT (yellow)
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
MAJ
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
CSTA
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
E1
1~16
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
E1
1~16
MAJ
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
CSTA
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LAN
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
3-21
3 Boards
The clock port (CLK), high-precision time port (TOD), and port for monitoring an outdoor
cabinet share the CLK/TOD port physically but use different pins of the CLK/TOD port. Table
3-10 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port.
Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port
Pin
Working Mode
Extern
al
Clock
External
Time Input
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
External
Time
Output
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
Port for
Monitori
ng an
Outdoor
Cabinet
CLK
receivin
g (-)
Not defined
Not defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
CLK
receivin
g (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
1PPS signal
input (-)
1PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal
input (-)
DCLS time
signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
CLK
transmi
tting (-)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
CLK
transmi
tting (+)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Not
defined
1PPS signal
input (+)
1PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal
input (+)
DCLS time
signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
3-22
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Pin
Working Mode
Extern
al
Clock
3 Boards
External
Time Input
External
Time
Output
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
Time
information
input (-)
Time
information
output (-)
Not
defined
Not
defined
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
Not
defined
Port for
Monitori
ng an
Outdoor
Cabinet
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
Not
defined
Time
information
input (+)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Not
defined
Not
defined
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not
used in this product version.
Table 3-11 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-11 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Port
Pin
Signal
F1/S1
Grounding end
Grounding end
3-23
3 Boards
Table 3-12 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.
Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port
Port
Pin
Signal
ALMI/
ALMO
Table 3-13 provides the pin assignments for the PHONE port.
Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the PHONE port
Port
Pin
Signal
PHONE
Not defined
2
3
4
RING
TIP
Not defined
7
8
3-24
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Buttons
Table 3-14 Buttons
Button
Name
Description
CF RCV
CF configuration restoration
button
RST
Service Ports
Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSTA
Port
Description
STM-1 (1)
STM-1 (2)
E1 (1-16)
Connector Type
LC (SFP optical module)
Anea 96
SFP optical modules are used to provide STM-1 optical ports; one SFP optical module provides
one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-9, in which TX represents the transmit
port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module
TX
RX
The E1 port uses the Anea 96 socket connector. Figure 3-10 shows the front view of an Anea
96 connector and Table 3-16 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-10 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-25
3 Boards
3-26
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
10
34
11
35
12
36
13
37
14
38
15
39
16
40
17
41
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
18
42
19
43
20
44
21
45
22
46
23
47
24
48
49
73
50
74
51
75
52
76
53
77
54
78
55
79
56
80
3-27
3 Boards
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
3-28
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Meaning
Erases databases.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSTA)
3-29
3 Boards
According to the function units, the CSTA is mapped into the logical system control and
communication board (CSTA), logical auxiliary management board (AUX), and logical service
boards (SL1D and SP3S) on the NMS.
Figure 3-13 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 1 (CSTA)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 8 (SL1D)
Slot 10 (AUX)
Slot 9 (SP3S)
120
75
Type
34060287
Ie-1
34060276
S-1.1
34060281
L-1.1
34060282
L-1.2
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
3-30
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Cross-Connection Capability
The CSTA supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12,
VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Performance
155520
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Fiber type
Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Transmission distance
(km)
15
40
80
Operating wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10
10
8.2
10
10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-31
3 Boards
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-21 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Impedance (ohm)
600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
3-32
Item
Performance
Transmission path
64
Interface type
Codirectional
Interface characteristics
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Performance
Transmission path
19.2
Interface characteristics
Performance
External synchronization
source
Frequency accuracy
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Item
Performance
Transmission path
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120
Interface characteristics
3-33
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-27 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
1.08 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 13.6 W
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
The CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC differ from each other with regard to the types and number of
service ports.
3.4.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.
3.4.2 Functions and Features
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division crossconnection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHA/
CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE service ports, PDH/SDH service ports, auxiliary ports, and
management ports.
3.4.3 Working Principle
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC consists of the system control and communication unit, packet
switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
3.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, service ports, management ports, auxiliary ports, buttons, and labels on the
front panel.
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.
3.4.6 Valid Slots
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of
two ordinary slots. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC, the
function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the
NMS.
3.4.7 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC indicates the E1 port impedance. The board
feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
3.4.8 Types of SFP Modules
The GE port and STM-1 optical port on the CSHC board support multiple types of SFP modules.
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3-34
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
3.4.10 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, SDH optical ports, E1 ports, clocks, and
auxiliary ports, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Board
CSHA
Basic functions
Clock
CSHB
CSHC
Switching
capability
Cross-connect
capacity
System control
and
communication
Clock
synchronization
at the physical
layer
Clock
protection
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-35
3 Boards
Board
CSHA
DCN
CSHB
Outband DCN
Supports a
maximum of
five DCCs.
Inband DCN
MPLS/PWE3 functions
Supported
Supports a
maximum of
five DCCs.
CSHC
Supported
Supports a
maximum of
seven DCCs.
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
3-36
Ethernet NM
port
NM serial port
NE cascading
port
Orderwire
phone port
Asynchronous
data port
Synchronous
data port
External alarm
port
Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
The port shares the same port with the external time
port and its specifications comply with RS-485.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
CSHA
OM
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Detection of
indicators on the
other boards
Supported
Pluggable CF
card
Supported
CSHB
CSHC
The packet switching unit of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC works with its service interface unit or a
service board to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-29 provides details about these
functions.
Table 3-29 MPLS/PWE3 functions
Function and Feature
MPLS tunnel
Board
Setup mode
Static LSPs
Protection
OAM
PWE3
Service
categories
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Setup mode
Static PWs
Protection
1:1 PW APS
3-37
3 Boards
Board
Supports the following OAM functions:
l VCCV
l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711.
l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
MS-PW
Supported
Configurable
bandwidth
Supported
The packet switching unit of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC works with its service processing unit or
a service board to implement QoS functions. Table 3-30 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-30 QoS functions
Function and
Feature
Board
DiffServ
Ethernet complex
traffic classification
CAR
Shaping
Queue scheduling
policies
The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC works with its packet switching
unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-31 provides details about these functions.
3-38
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
CSHA
Basic functions
Port
specifications
Port attributes
CSHB
CSHC
GE electrical
port (fixed):
10/100/1000BA
SE-T(X)
Not supported
GE port: SFP
module
(1000BASESX,
1000BASE-LX,
and GE
electrical
module)
Not supported
Not supported
Working mode
l The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
TAG attribute
Services
Jumbo frame
Traffic control
function
E-Line services
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-39
3 Boards
Board
CSHA
E-LAN services
CSHB
CSHC
LAG
Inter-board
LAG
Supported
Intra-board
LAG
Supported
ERPS
LPT
Supported
ETH-OAM
IEEE 802.1ag
OAM
IEEE 802.3ah
OAM
Supported
Clock
Clock source
Synchronous
Ethernet
Clock
protection
Synchronous
Ethernet
Synchronous
Ethernet (not
supported by the
SFP electrical
module)
3-40
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
CSHA
CSHB
CSHC
DCN
Inband DCN
OAM
Loopback
Warm reset
Supported
Query of SFP
module
information
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Table 3-32 provides details about the SDH service functions that the CSHC supports.
Table 3-32 SDH service functions that the CSHC supports
Function and Feature
Board
CSHC
Basic functions
Protection
Clock
Linear MSP
Supported
SNCP
Supported
Clock source
Clock
protection
DCN
Outband DCN
OM
Loopback
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-41
3 Boards
Board
CSHC
Setting of the
on/off state of a
laser
Supported
ALS functiona
Supported
Detection and
query of SFP
optical module
information
Supported
Supported
NOTE
Table 3-33 provides details about the PDH service functions that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
supports.
Table 3-33 PDH service functions that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports
Function and Feature
Board
CSHA
Basic functions
CSHC
Port
specifications
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
16
Clock
Clock source
Clock
protection
E1 retiming
function
Supported
Loopback
Supported
OM
3-42
CSHB
32
16
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
CSHA
PRBS tests at E1
ports
CSHB
CSHC
Supported
In this section, the CSHC is used as an example to describe the working principle of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
FE signal
access unit
FE signal
GE signal
GE signal
access unit
GE signal
STM-1 signal
processing unit
STM-1 signal
E1 signal
processing unit
E1 signal
GE bus
Packet
switching unit
VC-4
signal
VC-4
signal
VC-4 signal
Cross-connect
unit
Control bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
NE cascading port
Auxiliary interface
unit
Asynchronous/
Synchronous data port
System control
and
communication
unit
Monitoring signal
Clock unit
Clock signal
received from
the service
units on the
board
Clock signal
provided to
the other units
on the board
Power
supply
unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-43
3 Boards
The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.
The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
3-44
After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an
Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the
configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.
After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an Ethernet
board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and
communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and
communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the
Ethernet board.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-15 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-15 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
SinkTDM
service unit
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRC
codes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the FE signal access unit performs parallel/
serial conversion, encodes the FE signals, and then transmits the FE signals to the FE port.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
In the receive direction: After performing O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and
serial/parallel conversion for GE optical signals or after performing restructuring, decoding,
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-45
3 Boards
and serial/parallel conversion for GE electrical signals, the GE signal access unit extracts
framed GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE signal access unit
also performs CRC checks and Ethernet performance measurement.
l
In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRC
codes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the GE signal access unit performs parallel/
serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE signals to the GE electrical port or
the GE optical port after performing E/O conversion.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
3-46
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
SRV
SYNC
CSHA
STAT
PROG
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO
PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
E1
1~16
GE2
1. Indicators
2. Buttons
4. FE service ports
6. E1 (1-16) ports
SRV
SYNC
CSHB
STAT
PROG
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1
17~32
E1
1~16
1. Indicators
2. Buttons
4. FE service ports
6. E1 (1-32) ports
CSHC
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E1
1~16
1 21 2
GE1 GE2STM-1
CF RCV
RST RSTNMS/COM
CF RCV
EXT
NE
CLK/TIME
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
E1(1~16)
STM-1
STM-1
GEETH
1. Indicators
2. Buttons
4. FE service ports
5. GE optical/electrical
service ports (using SFP
modules)
7. E1 (1-16) ports
3-47
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-34 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHA/CSHB
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
PROG
On (green)
On (red)
SYNC
SRV
3-48
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (yellow)
Off
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
PROG
On (green)
On (red)
SYNC
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
3-49
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
SRV
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
On or blinking (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
On or blinking (yellow)
Off
On (red)
Off
On (red)
Off
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
3-50
Port
Description
NMS/COM
EXT
NE cascading port
CLK/TOD
Connector Type
RJ45
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Port
Description
Connector Type
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO
PHONE
NOTE
l The external clock port, external time port, outdoor cabinet monitoring port, and wayside E1 port share
one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes,
and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of
the preceding functions at a time.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit one orderwire byte. This port, however,
can transmit 64 kbit/s synchronous data or transparently transmit one orderwire byte at one time.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-19 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-19 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
NMS/COM
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Pin
Signal
Not defined
3-51
3 Boards
EXT
Pin
Signal
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-39 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-39 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
Off
On or blinking
Off
ACT (yellow)
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
SRV
SYNC
CSHA
STAT
PROG
Figure 3-20 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1
1~16
SYNC
SRV
STAT
CSHA
3-52
PROG
LAN
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1
1~16
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
The clock port (CLK), high-precision time port (TOD), and port for monitoring an outdoor
cabinet share the CLK/TOD port physically but use different pins of the CLK/TOD port. Table
3-40 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port.
Table 3-40 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port
Pin
Working Mode
Extern
al
Clock
External
Time Input
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
External
Time
Output
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
Port for
Monitori
ng an
Outdoor
Cabinet
CLK
receivin
g (-)
Not defined
Not defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
CLK
receivin
g (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
1PPS signal
input (-)
1PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal
input (-)
DCLS time
signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
CLK
transmi
tting (-)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
CLK
transmi
tting (+)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Not
defined
1PPS signal
input (+)
1PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal
input (+)
DCLS time
signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-53
3 Boards
Pin
Working Mode
Extern
al
Clock
External
Time Input
External
Time
Output
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
Time
information
input (-)
Time
information
output (-)
Not
defined
Not
defined
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
Not
defined
Port for
Monitori
ng an
Outdoor
Cabinet
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
Not
defined
Time
information
input (+)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Not
defined
Not
defined
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
Table 3-41 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-41 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port
Pin
Signal
F1/S1
Grounding end
Grounding end
Table 3-42 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.
3-54
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
ALMI/
ALMO
Table 3-43 provides the pin assignments for the PHONE port.
Table 3-43 Pin assignments for the PHONE port
Port
Pin
Signal
PHONE
Not defined
2
3
4
RING
TIP
Not defined
7
8
Buttons
Table 3-44 Buttons
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Button
Name
Description
CF RCV
CF configuration restoration
button
3-55
3 Boards
Button
Name
Description
RST
Service Ports
Table 3-45 Description of service ports on the CSHA/CSHB
Port
Description
FE1
FE port
Connector Type
FE2
GE1
RJ45
GE electrical port
GE2
E1 (1-16)
E1 (17-32)
Anea 96
NOTE
a. Only the CSHB provides 32 E1 signal ports. The CSHA provides only 16 E1 signal ports.
Description
FE1
FE port
Connector Type
RJ45
FE2
GE1
GE2
STM-1(1)
STM-1(2)
E1 (1-16)
Anea 96
NOTE
On the NMS, FE1 and FE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; GE1 and GE2 correspond to
PORT3 and PORT4 respectively.
3-56
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE optical ports and STM-1 optical ports; one SFP
optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-21, in which
TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-21 Ports of the SFP optical module
RX
TX
The FE ports and GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes.
Table 3-47 and Table 3-48 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different
modes.
Table 3-47 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+
TX-
BIDA-
RX+
BIDB+
Reserved
BIDC+
Reserved
BIDC-
RX-
BIDB-
Reserved
BIDD+
Reserved
BIDD-
Table 3-48 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
BIDB+
3-57
3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX-
BIDB-
TX+
BIDA+
Reserved
BIDD+
Reserved
BIDD-
TX-
BIDA-
Reserved
BIDC+
Reserved
BIDC-
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same
as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.
The E1 port uses the Anea 96 socket connector. Figure 3-22 shows the front view of an Anea
96 connector and Table 3-49 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-22 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
3-58
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
25
26
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
10
34
11
35
12
36
13
37
14
38
15
39
16
40
17
41
18
42
19
43
20
44
21
45
3-59
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
22
46
23
47
24
48
49
73
50
74
51
75
52
76
53
77
54
78
55
79
56
80
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
3-60
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-61
3 Boards
Meaning
Erases databases.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)
The CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are mapped into different logical boards on the NMS.
Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
3-62
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 ( CSHA )
Slot 10 ( AUX )
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 7 (EM4T)
Slot 9 (SP3S)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Figure 3-26 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 1 (CSHB )
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 10 ( AUX )
Slot 7 (EM4T)
Slot 9 (SP3D)
Figure 3-27 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 ( CSHC ) Slot 10 ( AUX )
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 7 (EM4F)
Slot 8 (SL1D)
Slot 9 (SP3S)
120
75
Type
34060286
1000BASE-SX
34060473
1000BASE-LX
34100052
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
Table 3-53 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1 optical port supports
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Part Number
Type
34060287
Ie-1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-63
3 Boards
Part Number
Type
34060276
S-1.1
34060281
L-1.1
34060282
L-1.2
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.10.2.10 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
A.10.4.5 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Basic Attributes
A.10.4.6 Parameter Description: External Time Port_BMC
A.10.4.7 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Cable Transmission Distance
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces
A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Cross-Connection Capability
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8
VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Performance
1000
Classification code
1000Base-SX
1000Base-LX
Fiber type
Multiple-mode optical
fiber
Single-mode optical
fiber
0.5
10
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
-17
-20
-3
9.5
9.5
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern
Interface type
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
RJ-45
3-65
3 Boards
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern
Interface type
RJ-45
Performance
155520
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Fiber type
Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Transmission distance
(km)
15
40
80
Operating wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10
10
8.2
10
10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
3-66
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-58 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Impedance (ohm)
600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Item
Performance
Transmission path
64
Interface type
Codirectional
Interface characteristics
3-67
3 Boards
Performance
Transmission path
19.2
Interface characteristics
Performance
External synchronization
source
Frequency accuracy
3-68
Item
Performance
Transmission path
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120
Interface characteristics
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-64 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
CSHA: 1.11 kg
CSHB: 1.16 kg
CSHC: 1.13 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the CSHA: < 18.0 W
Power consumption of the CSHB: < 22.7 W
Power consumption of the CSHC: < 19.6 W
3.5 CSHD
The CSHD is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
3.5.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSHD is SLA1.
3.5.2 Functions and Features
The CSHD provides 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system
control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHD provides FE/GE service
ports, E1 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports.
3.5.3 Working Principle
The CSHD consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, crossconnect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, service ports, management ports, auxiliary ports, buttons, and a label on
the front panel.
3.5.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.
3.5.6 Valid Slots
The CSHD is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary
slots. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSHD, the function units are mapped into
specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the NMS.
3.5.7 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the CSHD indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
3.5.8 Types of SFP Modules
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-69
3 Boards
The GE port on the CSHD board supports three types of SFP modules.
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHD.
3.5.10 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, E1 ports, clocks, and auxiliary ports, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Clock
Board
Switching
capability
Cross-connect
capacity
System control
and
communication
Clock
synchronization
at the physical
layer
Clock
protection
3-70
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
DCN
Board
ACR
Supported
IEEE 1588v2
protocol
Supported
Outband DCN
Inband DCN
MPLS/PWE3 functions
Supported
See Table 3-66.
QoS functions
Supported
See Table 3-67.
Supported
See Table 3-68.
E1 service functions
Supported
See Table 3-69.
Auxiliary ports
and
management
ports
OM
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Ethernet NM
port
NM serial port
NE cascading
port
Orderwire
phone port
Asynchronous
data port
Synchronous
data port
External alarm
port
Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
Supported
The port shares the same port with the external time
port and its specifications comply with RS-485.
3-71
3 Boards
Board
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Detection of
indicators on the
other boards
Supported
Pluggable CF
card
Supported
The packet switching unit of the CSHD works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement MPLS/PWE3 function. Table 3-66 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-66 MPLS/PWE3 functions
Function and Feature
MPLS tunnel
Board
Setup mode
Static LSPs
Protection
OAM
PWE3
Service
categories
3-72
Setup mode
Static PWs
Protection
1:1 PW APS
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
Supports the following OAM functions:
l VCCV
l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711.
l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
MS-PW
Supported
Configurable
bandwidth
Supported
The packet switching unit of the CSHD works with its service interface unit or a service board
to implement QoS functions. Table 3-67 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-67 QoS functions
Function and
Feature
Board
DiffServ
Ethernet complex
traffic classification
CAR
Shaping
Queue scheduling
policies
The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHD works with its packet switching unit to
implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-68 provides details about these functions.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-73
3 Boards
Port
specifications
Port attributes
Board
Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works
with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.
FE electrical
port:
10/100BASE-T
(X)
GE port: SFP
module
(1000BASESX,
1000BASE-LX,
and GE
electrical
module)
Working mode
TAG attribute
Services
Jumbo frame
Traffic control
function
E-Line services
E-LAN services
3-74
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
Inter-board
LAG
Supported
Intra-board
LAG
Supported
ERPS
LPT
Supported
ETH OAM
IEEE 802.1ag
OAM
IEEE 802.3ah
OAM
RMON
Clock
Clock source
Clock
protection
DCN
Inband DCN
OAM
Loopback
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Warm reset
Supported
Query of SFP
module
information
Supported
3-75
3 Boards
The E1 service interface unit of the CSHD works with its packet switching unit to implement
E1 service functions. Table 3-69 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-69 E1 service functions
Function and Feature
Board
Basic functions
E1 service categories
Port
specifications
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
Fractional E1
Native E1
ATM/IMA
16
Supports transparent service transmission at the 64
kbit/s level.
Transport mode
Retiming
Supported
Maximum
number of ATM
services
64
Maximum
number of ATM
connections
256
ATM traffic
management
Supported
ATM
encapsulation
mode
3-76
Maximum
number of
concatenated
ATM cells
31
ATM OAM
IMA protection
Supported
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
Maximum
number of
services
16
Encapsulation
mode
Clock
OM
Service
category
Point-to-point services
Compression of
idle slots
Jitter buffering
time (us)
375-16000
Packet loading
time (us)
125-5000
CES ACR
Supported
Retiming
Supported
Clock source
Clock
protection
Loopback
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-77
3 Boards
FE signal
FE signal
access unit
GE signal
GE signal
access unit
E1 signal
E1 signal
processing unit
Packet
switching unit
GE bus
Service board
GE signal
VC-4
signal
VC-4 signal
Control bus
EthernetNM port
NM serial port
System control and
communication unit
NE cascading port
Asynchronous data port
Synchronous data port
External alarm port
Auxiliary
interface
unit
Monitoring signal
External clock signal
Power supplied to the
other units on the board
Clock unit
Clock signal
received from
the service
unit on the
board
Power
supply unit
Clock signal
provided to
the other
units on the
board
-48 V1
-48 V2
3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
12 V power supplied to fans
3-78
The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.
The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.
The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an
Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the
configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.
After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an Ethernet
board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and
communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and
communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the
Ethernet board.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-29 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
Higher order
cross-connect
module
HOXC
SinkTDM
service unit
Lower order
cross-connect
module
LOXC
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-79
3 Boards
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRC
codes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the FE signal access unit performs parallel/
serial conversion, encodes the FE signals, and then transmits the FE signals to the FE port.
In the receive direction: After performing O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and
serial/parallel conversion for GE optical signals or after performing restructuring, decoding,
and serial/parallel conversion for GE electrical signals, the GE signal access unit extracts
framed GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE signal access unit
also performs CRC checks and Ethernet performance measurement.
In the transmit direction: After delimiting frames, adding preambles, calculating CRC
codes, and measuring Ethernet performance, the GE signal access unit performs parallel/
serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE signals to the GE electrical port or
the GE optical port after performing E/O conversion.
In the receive direction, the E1 signal processing unit performs the following functions:
Implements the functions of impedance matching, signal equalization, level conversion,
clock recovery, de-jitter, and decoding for received E1 signals.
If the received E1 signals need to be transmitted through the TDM plane in form of
native E1 signals, the E1 signal processing unit maps the E1 signals into VC-4s,
performs pointer processing, and sends the signals to the cross-connect unit for
grooming.
3-80
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
If the received E1 signals need to be transmitted through the packet switched plane in
form of packet services, the E1 signal processing unit performs PWE3 encapsulation
for a required service category such as ATM service, IMA service, and CES service,
and sends the encapsulated packets to the packet switching unit for grooming.
l
In the transmit direction, the E1 signal processing unit performs the following functions:
For the VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit, the E1 signal processing unit
implements the functions of clock processing, demapping, and overhead processing,
and extracts E1 signals.
For the PWE3 packets from the packet switching unit, the E1 signal processing unit
implements the functions of protocol processing, PWE3 decapsulation, queue
scheduling, and other QoS processing, and sends out E1 signals.
For output E1 signals, the interface part of the E1 signal processing unit implements the
functions of encoding, de-jitter, pulse shaping, and line driving, and sends the signals
to an E1 port.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock
sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the
phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals
and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the
other boards.
The clock unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages from the FE signal access unit and GE signal
access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time synchronization.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-81
3 Boards
CSHD
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
TX RX
1 2
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1
F1/S1
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE
1. Indicators
2. Buttons
4. FE service ports
5. GE optical/electrical
service ports (using SFP
modules)
6. E1 (1-16) ports
Indicators
Table 3-70 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHD
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
PROG
On (green)
3-82
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
On or blinking (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
On or blinking (yellow)
Off
3-83
3 Boards
Description
Connector Type
NMS/COM
EXT
NE cascading port
CLK/TOD1
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO
TEL/MON/
TOD2
RJ45
NOTE
l External clock port 1, external time port 1, and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port
can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous
data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. This port, however,
can transmit 64 kbit/s synchronous data or transparently transmit one orderwire byte at one time.
l External time port 2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. This port,
however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-31 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-31 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
NMS/COM
3-84
Pin
Signal
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Port
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Not defined
EXT
Pin
Signal
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-74 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-74 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
Off
On or blinking
Off
ACT (yellow)
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-85
3 Boards
CSHD
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
Figure 3-32 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
E1
1~16
TX RX
CF
RCV
RS
T
1 2
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1
F1/S1
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE
CSHD
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
LAN
E1
1~16
TX RX
CF
RCV
RS
T
1 2
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD1
F1/S1
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE
The clock port (CLK) and the high-precision time port (TOD1) use different pins of the same
RJ45 connector. The pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port are provided in Table 3-75. The
CLK/TOD1 port can work only in one mode at one time and does not support two or more modes
at the same time.
Table 3-75 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin
Working Mode
External
Clock
3-86
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Informati
on)
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External
Time
Output
(DCLS)
CLK
receiving (-)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
CLK
receiving (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
1PPS signal
input (-)
1PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal input
(-)
DCLS time
signal output
(-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
CLK
transmitting
(-)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
CLK
transmitting
(+)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Pin
Working Mode
External
Clock
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Informati
on)
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
1PPS signal
input (+)
1PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
input (-)
Time
information
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
input (+)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External
Time
Output
(DCLS)
DCLS time
signal input
(+)
DCLS time
signal output
(+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Table 3-76 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
Table 3-76 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port
Pin
Signal
F1/S1
Grounding end
Grounding end
Table 3-77 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-87
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
ALMI/
ALMO
The orderwire phone port, time port, and port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the TEL/
MON/TOD2 port physically. The pin assignments for the TEL/MON/TOD2 port are provided
in Table 3-78.
Table 3-78 Pin assignment of the TEL/MON/TOD2 port
Pin
Working Mode
PHONE
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Informa
tion)
(1PPS +
Time
Informati
on)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
Port for
Monitorin
g an
Outdoor
Cabinet
Not
defined
Not
defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not
defined
Not
defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not
defined
1PPS
signal
input (-)
1PPS signal
output (-)
DCLS time
signal input
(-)
DCLS time
signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal input
(-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
4
3-88
RING
Groundin
g end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Pin
3 Boards
Working Mode
PHONE
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
External
Time
Input
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Informa
tion)
(1PPS +
Time
Informati
on)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
Port for
Monitorin
g an
Outdoor
Cabinet
TIP
Groundin
g end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Not
defined
1PPS
signal
input (+)
1PPS signal
output (+)
DCLS time
signal input
(+)
DCLS time
signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal input
(+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422
level)
Not
defined
Time
informati
on input
(-)
(RS-422
level)
Not
defined
Time
informati
on input
(+)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (-)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422
level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (+)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422
level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
Buttons
Table 3-79 Buttons
Button
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Name
Description
CF RCV
CF configuration restoration
button
RST
3-89
3 Boards
Service Ports
Table 3-80 Description of the service ports on the CSHD
Port
Description
FE1
FE port
Connector Type
FE2
RJ45
FE3
FE4
GE1
GE optical/electrical port
GE2
E1 (1-16)
Anea 96
NOTE
On the NMS, FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT1 to PORT4 respectively; GE1 and GE2 correspond to
PORT5 and PORT6 respectively.
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE optical ports; one SFP optical module provides one
TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-33, in which TX represents the transmit port
and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-33 Ports of the SFP optical module
RX
TX
The FE ports and GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes.
Table 3-81 and Table 3-82 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different
modes.
Table 3-81 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin
3-90
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+
TX-
BIDA-
RX+
BIDB+
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Pin
3 Boards
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
Reserved
BIDC+
Reserved
BIDC-
RX-
BIDB-
Reserved
BIDD+
Reserved
BIDD-
Table 3-82 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
BIDB+
RX-
BIDB-
TX+
BIDA+
Reserved
BIDD+
Reserved
BIDD-
TX-
BIDA-
Reserved
BIDC+
Reserved
BIDC-
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same
as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port.
The E1 port uses the Anea 96 socket connector. Figure 3-34 shows the front view of an Anea
96 connector and Table 3-83 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-91
3 Boards
POS.96
3-92
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
10
34
11
35
12
36
13
37
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
14
38
15
39
16
40
17
41
18
42
19
43
20
44
21
45
22
46
23
47
24
48
49
73
50
74
51
75
52
76
53
77
54
78
55
79
56
80
3-93
3 Boards
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
1. DIP switches
3-94
2. CF card
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Erases databases.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3-95
3 Boards
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHD)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 7 (EM6X)
Slot 9 (MP1)
75
120
Type
34060286
1000BASE-SX
34060473
1000BASE-LX
34100052
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
3-96
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.10.2.10 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
A.10.4.5 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Basic Attributes
A.10.4.6 Parameter Description: External Time Port_BMC
A.10.4.7 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Cable Transmission Distance
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces
A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Working Modes of Ports
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes
Cross-Connection Capability
The CSHD supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12,
VC-3, or VC-4 level.
3-97
3 Boards
Performance
1000
Classification code
1000Base-SX
1000Base-LX
Fiber type
Multiple-mode optical
fiber
Single-mode optical
fiber
0.5
10
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
-17
-20
-3
9.5
9.5
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern
Interface type
RJ-45
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern
3-98
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Item
Performance
Interface type
RJ-45
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-90 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Impedance (ohm)
600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-99
3 Boards
Performance
Transmission path
64
Interface type
Codirectional
Interface characteristics
Performance
Transmission path
19.2
Interface characteristics
Performance
External synchronization
source
Frequency accuracy
3-100
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-95 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
1.00 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 32.2 W
3.6 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.6.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
3.6.2 Functions and Features
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
3.6.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
3.6.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3-101
3 Boards
Board
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
Basic functions
TU/STM-1-based radio
Protection
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
SNCP
Supported
License
Clock
Clock
protection
DCN
Inband DCN
Not supported
Outband DCN
OM
Loopback
3-102
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported
SMODEM
unit
Overhead bus
Control bus
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
M U X /D E M U X unit
IF
processing
unit
C om bin er
interfac e
u nit
IF
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Power
supply
unit
Clock
unit
-48 V
+3.3 V
3-103
3 Boards
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit
SMODEM unit
IF processing unit
MODEM unit
3-104
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-105
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
Logic processing
unit
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
3-106
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
MODEM unit
IF processing unit
SMODEM unit
Combiner interface
unit
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-107
3 Boards
PULL
IF1
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IF1
ODU-PWR
IF
Indicators
Table 3-99 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
3-108
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Indicator
RMT
ACT
State
Meaning
On (yellow)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-100 Description of the Ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-109
3 Boards
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 1
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-41 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 1
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 10
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 8
Description
Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
3-110
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Modulation Mode
4xE1
QPSK
4xE1
16QAM
3.5
8xE1
QPSK
14 (13.75)
8xE1
16QAM
16xE1
QPSK
28 (27.5)
16xE1
16QAM
14 (13.75)
22xE1
32QAM
14 (13.75)
26xE1
64QAM
14 (13.75)
35xE1
16QAM
28 (27.5)
44xE1
32QAM
28 (27.5)
53xE1
64QAM
28 (27.5)
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The
channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
l The OptiX RTN 910 whose configuration mode is the PDH microwave equipment supports the first six
microwave modulation modes.
l The OptiX RTN 910 whose configuration mode is the SDH microwave equipment supports all microwave
modulation mode. If the OptiX RTN 910 supports the 4xE1/16QAM microwave modulation mode, it cannot
use the high power ODU.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-111
3 Boards
IF Performance
Table 3-103 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
10
50
Performance
Encoding mode
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-105 Mechanical behavior
3-112
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
0.72 kg
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
3.7 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
3.7.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
3.7.2 Functions and Features
The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
3.7.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
3.7.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
3.7.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Board
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-113
3 Boards
Board
Integrated IP radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM
Supported
E1 priority
Protection
License
Clock at the
physical layer
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
Supported
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock
protection
IEEE 1588v2
clock
DCN
Time
synchronization
Supported
Frequency
synchronization
Not supported
Clock mode
Inband DCN
Supported.
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN
Ethernet service functions
3-114
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
PWE3 functions
OM
Board
Loopback
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported
E-Line services
Board
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-115
3 Boards
Board
Supports the following types of E-LAN services:
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS
OAM
Jumbo frame
LAG
Supported
QoS
RMON
Supported
3-116
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
SMODEM
unit
MODEM
unit
Overhead bus
Logic
processing
unit
Microwave frame
signal
Service bus
M U X /D E M U X unit
IF processing
unit
Combiner
interface unit
IF
Paired board
Ethernet
processing
unit
GE bus
Control bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
Power
supply
unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit
SMODEM unit
IF processing unit
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-117
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MODEM unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Ethernet processing
unit
Logic processing
unit
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
3-118
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Ethernet processing
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Processes GE signals.
MODEM unit
IF processing unit
SMODEM unit
Combiner interface
unit
3-119
3 Boards
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
IFU2
ODU-PWR
IF
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IFU2
Indicators
Table 3-110 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
LINK
3-120
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ODU
On (green)
On (red)
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
Blinks on (yellow)
and off at 300 ms
intervals
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
Ports
Table 3-111 Description of the Ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-121
3 Boards
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-45 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS
Slot 5
(PIU)
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Description
Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
3-122
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
microwave
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation Mode
QPSK
9 to 12
16QAM
20 to 24
10
32QAM
24 to 29
12
64QAM
31 to 37
15
128QAM
37 to 44
18
256QAM
43 to 51
21
14 (13.75)
QPSK
20 to 23
10
14 (13.75)
16QAM
41 to 48
20
14 (13.75)
32QAM
50 to 59
24
14 (13.75)
64QAM
65 to 76
31
14 (13.75)
128QAM
77 to 90
37
14 (13.75)
256QAM
90 to 104
43
28 (27.5)
QPSK
41 to 48
20
28 (27.5)
16QAM
82 to 97
40
28 (27.5)
32QAM
108 to 125
52
28 (27.5)
64QAM
130 to 150
64
28 (27.5)
128QAM
160 to 180
75
3-123
3 Boards
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
microwave
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation Mode
28 (27.5)
256QAM
180 to 210
75
56 (55)
QPSK
82 to 97
40
56 (55)
16QAM
165 to 190
75
56 (55)
32QAM
208 to 240
75
56 (55)
64QAM
260 to 310
75
56 (55)
128QAM
310 to 360
75
56 (55)
256QAM
360 to 420
75
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The
channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for
Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Table 3-114 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
10
3-124
50
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-116 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions
Weight
0.79 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W
3.8 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
3.8.2 Functions and Features
The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
3.8.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-125
3 Boards
Board
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
Basic functions
Integrated IP radio
NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.
Service categories
Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM
Supported
E1 priority
XPIC
Supported
Protection
License
3-126
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
Supported
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Clock at the
physical layer
Board
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock
protection
IEEE 1588v2
DCN
Time
synchronization
Supported
Frequency
synchronization
Not supported
Clock mode
Inband DCN
Supported.
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN
MPLS functions
PWE3 functions
OM
Loopback
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
3-127
3 Boards
Board
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
E-Line services
Board
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services
ERPS
ETH-OAM
Jumbo frame
LAG
Supported
QoS
RMON
Supported
3-128
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
SMODEM
unit
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF
processing
unit
Paired XPIC
board
Combiner
interface
unit
IF
Service bus
Logic
processing
unit
ODU control
signal
Overhead
bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
GE bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
XPIC signal
Control bus
Power
supply
unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit
SMODEM unit
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-129
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
IF processing unit
MODEM unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Ethernet processing
unit
3-130
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Ethernet processing
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Processes GE signals.
MODEM unit
IF processing unit
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
SMODEM unit
Combiner interface
unit
3-131
3 Boards
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
I
X-IN
X-OUT
IFX2
ODU-PWR
IF
XPIC
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IFX2
Indicators
Table 3-121 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2
3-132
Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
On (red)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
STAT
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-133
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
Off
Ports
Table 3-122 Description of the ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
X-IN
SMA
XPIC cable
X-OUT
SMA
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-49 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Description
NOTE
One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.
Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-135
3 Boards
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
microwave
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation Mode
28 (27.5)
QPSK
41 to 48
19
28 (27.5)
16QAM
84 to 97
40
28 (27.5)
32QAM
103 to 120
49
28 (27.5)
64QAM
130 to 150
63
28 (27.5)
128QAM
160 to 180
75
28 (27.5)
256QAM
180 to 210
75
56 (55)
QPSK
83 to 97
39
56 (55)
16QAM
165 to 190
75
56 (55)
32QAM
210 to 245
75
56 (55)
64QAM
260 to 305
75
56 (55)
128QAM
310 to 360
75
56 (55)
256QAM
360 to 410
75
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The
channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for
Ethernet services.
3-136
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
IF Performance
Table 3-125 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
10
50
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-127 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions
Weight
0.80 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 33 W
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-137
3 Boards
3.9 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.9.1 Version Description
The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.
3.9.2 Functions and Features
The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.
3.9.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Board
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3-138
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
l Integrated IP radio
Radio type
l SDH radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
l STM-1
AM
High-efficiency encapsulation
E1 priority
Link-level
protection
l 2xSTM-1
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
LAG protection
at air interfaces
Supported
Service protection
SNCP
MPLS functions
PWE3 functions
License
Clock at the
physical layer
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock
protection
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-139
3 Boards
DCN
Board
Time
synchronization
Supported
Frequency
synchronization
Not supported
Clock mode
Inband DCN
Supported
Outband DCN
OM
Loopback
3-140
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
E-Line services
Board
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services
ERPS
OAM
Jumbo frame
LAG
Supported
QoS
RMON
Supported
The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service categories.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-141
3 Boards
SMODEM
unit
Microwave
frame signal
Overhead bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
MODEM unit
IF processing
unit
Combiner
interface unit
IF
Service bus
Logic
processing
unit
Paired board
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
GE bus
Control bus
-48 V1
Power
supply
unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit
SMODEM unit
IF processing unit
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.
3-142
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
MODEM unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Ethernet processing
unit
Logic processing
unit
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-143
3 Boards
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Ethernet processing
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Processes GE signals.
MODEM unit
IF processing unit
SMODEM unit
Combiner interface
unit
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
ISU2
ODU-PWR
IF
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
ISU2
Indicators
Table 3-132 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
On (green)
On (red)
3-145
3 Boards
Indicator
LINK
ODU
State
Meaning
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-133 Description of the Ports
3-146
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
ODU-PWRa
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 1
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-53 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS
Slot 5
(PIU)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 1
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 10
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
3-147
3 Boards
Description
Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3-148
Service Capacity
Modulation Mode
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
2STM-1
128QAM
56 (55)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Table 3-136 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation Mode
Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
microwave
QPSK
10 to 13
16QAM
21 to 26
10
32QAM
25 to 31
12
64QAM
31 to 40
15
128QAM
37 to 47
18
256QAM
43 to 53
20
14 (13.75)
QPSK
21 to 26
10
14 (13.75)
16QAM
41 to 52
20
14 (13.75)
32QAM
52 to 65
24
14 (13.75)
64QAM
66 to 83
31
14 (13.75)
128QAM
77 to 97
37
14 (13.75)
256QAM
89 to 111
42
28 (27.5)
QPSK
41 to 51
20
28 (27.5)
16QAM
83 to 105
40
28 (27.5)
32QAM
108 to 136
52
28 (27.5)
64QAM
133 to 168
64
28 (27.5)
128QAM
157 to 198
75
28 (27.5)
256QAM
183 to 230
75
56 (55)
QPSK
83 to 105
40
56 (55)
16QAM
167 to 212
75
56 (55)
32QAM
208 to 262
75
56 (55)
64QAM
265 to 333
75
56 (55)
128QAM
312 to 396
75
56 (55)
256QAM
363 to 456
75
40
QPSK
57 to 72
27
40
16QAM
115 to 145
55
40
32QAM
149 to 187
71
3-149
3 Boards
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation Mode
Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
microwave
40
64QAM
183 to 230
75
40
128QAM
217 to 272
75
40
256QAM
252 to 318
75
Table 3-137 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet
service)
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation Mode
Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
Number of STM-1
Services in Hybrid
microwave
28 (27.5)
128QAM
157 to 198
28 (27.5)
256QAM
183 to 230
40
64QAM
183 to 230
40
128QAM
217 to 272
40
256QAM
252 to 318
56 (55)
16QAM
167 to 212
56 (55)
32QAM
208 to 262
56 (55)
64QAM
265 to 333
56 (55)
128QAM
312 to 396
56 (55)
256QAM
363 to 456
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The
channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for
Ethernet services.
3-150
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
IF Performance
Table 3-138 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
10
50
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-140 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
Weight
0.60 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 22 W
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-151
3 Boards
3.10 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.10.1 Version Description
The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.
3.10.2 Functions and Features
The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.
3.10.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3-152
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
Basic functions
Radio type
l SDH radio
NOTE
The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
l STM-1
AM
High-efficiency encapsulation
E1 priority
XPIC
Supported
Link-level
protection
Native TDM
services
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection
Supported
LAG protection
at air interfaces
Supported
Service
categories
Service
protection
SNCP
MPLS functions
PWE3 functions
License
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
l 2xSTM-1
Air interface
capacity license
Supported
3-153
3 Boards
Clock at the
physical layer
Board
AM license
Supported
Clock source
Clock
protection
IEEE 1588v2
clock
DCN
Time
synchronization
Supported
Frequency
synchronization
Not supported
Clock mode
Inband DCN
Supported
Outband DCN
OM
Loopback
3-154
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
Supported
E-Line services
Board
Supports the following types of E-Line services:
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN services
ERPS
OAM
Jumbo frame
LAG
Supported
QoS
RMON
Supported
The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-155
3 Boards
SMODEM
unit
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF
processing
unit
Paired XPIC
board
Combiner
interface
unit
IF
Service bus
Logic
processing
unit
ODU control
signal
Overhead
bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
GE bus
XPIC signal
Control bus
-48 V1
Power
supply
unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit
SMODEM unit
3-156
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
IF processing unit
MODEM unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-157
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Ethernet processing
unit
Logic processing
unit
NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Ethernet processing
unit
MUX/DEMUX unit
l Processes GE signals.
MODEM unit
3-158
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
IF processing unit
SMODEM unit
Combiner interface
unit
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion.
Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
PULL
I
X-IN
X-OUT
ISX2
ODU-PWR
IF
XPIC
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
ISX2
3-159
3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-145 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2
Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
On (red)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
Off
STAT
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
3-160
On (yellow)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
RMT
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
ACT
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
standby one.
Off
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.
Ports
Table 3-146 Description of the ports
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF port
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
X-IN
SMA
XPIC cable
X-OUT
SMA
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-161
3 Boards
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot
6
(FAN)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 1
An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-57 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS
Slot
5
(PIU)
Slot
6
(FAN)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Description
NOTE
One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the
same column.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
Modulation Mode
STM-1
128QAM
28 (27.5)
2STM-1
128QAM
56 (55)
Table 3-149 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation Mode
Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
microwave
28 (27.5)
QPSK
41 to 51
20
28 (27.5)
16QAM
83 to 105
40
28 (27.5)
32QAM
108 to 136
52
28 (27.5)
64QAM
133 to 168
64
28 (27.5)
128QAM
157 to 198
75
28 (27.5)
256QAM
183 to 230
75
56 (55)
QPSK
83 to 105
40
56 (55)
16QAM
167 to 212
75
3-163
3 Boards
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation Mode
Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
microwave
56 (55)
32QAM
208 to 262
75
56 (55)
64QAM
265 to 333
75
56 (55)
128QAM
312 to 396
75
56 (55)
256QAM
363 to 456
75
40
QPSK
57 to 72
27
40
16QAM
115 to 145
55
40
32QAM
149 to 187
71
40
64QAM
183 to 230
75
40
128QAM
217 to 272
75
40
256QAM
252 to 318
75
Table 3-150 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet
service)
3-164
Channel Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation Mode
Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
Number of STM-1
Services in Hybrid
microwave
28 (27.5)
128QAM
157 to 198
28 (27.5)
256QAM
183 to 230
40
64QAM
183 to 230
40
128QAM
217 to 272
40
256QAM
252 to 318
56 (55)
16QAM
167 to 212
56 (55)
32QAM
208 to 262
56 (55)
64QAM
265 to 333
56 (55)
128QAM
312 to 396
56 (55)
256QAM
363 to 456
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The
channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for
Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Table 3-151 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
140
Modulation mode
ASK
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
10
50
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
LDPC encoding
Supported
3-165
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-153 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
Weight
0.60 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W
3.11 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two
GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The
GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP
modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on
the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
3.11.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
3.11.2 Functions and Features
The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE
signals.
3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example
to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS are the same as the physical slots.
3.11.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. The EM6T does not have a feature
code.
3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
3.11.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3-166
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
EM6T
Basic functions
Port
specifications
EM6F
Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port
Provides two
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
ports (fixed).
1 Gbit/s
Port attributes
l The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
Working mode
1 Gbit/s
Jumbo frame
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-167
3 Boards
Board
EM6T
Services
EM6F
Traffic control
function
E-Line services
E-LAN services
LAG
Inter-board
LAG
Supported
Supported
Intra-board
LAG
Supported
Supported
ERPS
LPT
Supported
QoS
Supported
DiffServ
Complex traffic
classification
CAR
Shaping
Queue
scheduling
policies
3-168
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
EM6T
ETH OAM
IEEE 802.1ag
OAM
EM6F
IEEE 802.3ah
OAM
Supported
Clock source
Synchronous Ethernet
Synchronous Ethernet
(not supported by the SFP
electrical module)
Clock
protection
RMON
Clock
DCN
Inband DCN
OAM
Loopback
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Supported
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Supported
3-169
3 Boards
Board
EM6T
Query of SFP
module
information
Not supported
EM6F
Supported
FE signal
access unit
Control signal
Ethernet
processing
unit
Ethernet
signal
Logic
processing
unit
Ethernet
signal
Packet switching unit
Control signal
FE signal
Control bus of the board
Logic
control unit
Control bus
Power
supply unit
3-170
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock unit
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Function Unit
Processing Flow
GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
Ethernet processing
unit
Logic processing
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Ethernet processing
unit
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-171
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3-172
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
EM6T
STAT
PROG
SRV
EM6T
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
EM6F
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
LINK2
EM6F
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Indicators
Table 3-157 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
PROG
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-173
3 Boards
Indicator
LINK1a
LINK2a
State
Meaning
Off
On (green)
Blinking (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Flashing (green)
Off
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical ports.
Ports
Table 3-158 Description of the ports on the EM6T
Port
FE1
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
RJ45
Network cable
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
RJ45
FE service port
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE1
GE2
Description
FE service port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Port
3 Boards
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE1
GE2
NOTE
On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to
PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6F complies with the 10/100BASET(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T complies with the
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6F
complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. All
service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments
for the ports, see Table 3-160 and Table 3-161. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see
Figure 3-61.
Figure 3-61 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-160 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+
TX-
BIDA-
RX+
BIDB+
Reserved
BIDC+
3-175
3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
Reserved
BIDC-
RX-
BIDB-
Reserved
BIDD+
Reserved
BIDD-
Table 3-161 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
BIDB+
RX-
BIDB-
TX+
BIDA+
Reserved
BIDD+
Reserved
BIDD-
TX-
BIDA-
Reserved
BIDC+
Reserved
BIDC-
Each FE/GE service port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see
Table 3-162.
3-176
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Table 3-162 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
Off
On or blinking
Off
ACT (yellow)
SFP optical modules are used to provide GE service ports on the EM6F; one SFP optical module
provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-62, in which TX represents the
transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-62 Ports of the SFP optical module
RX
TX
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 1
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
3-177
3 Boards
Description
Module Type
01
1000BASE-SX
34060286
02
1000BASE-LX
34060473
03
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
34100052
Related References
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
3-178
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Performance
1000
Classification code
1000Base-SX
1000Base-LX
Fiber type
Multiple-mode optical
fiber
Single-mode optical
fiber
0.5
10
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
-9 to -3
-9 to -3
-17
-20
-3
9.5
9.5
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern
Interface type
RJ-45
3-179
3 Boards
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern
Interface type
RJ-45
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-168 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
EM6T
EM6F
Dimensions
Weight
0.37 kg
0.40 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W
3.12 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
3.12.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.
3.12.2 Functions and Features
The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals
from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the
Ethernet signals on the PDH network.
3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.
3.12.5 Valid Slots
3-180
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the
same as the physical slots.
3.12.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.
3.12.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Board
Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and
1xGE packet plane signals and
performs EoPDH processing.
Port specifications
FE electrical port:
10/100BASE-T(X)
Port attributes
Working mode
TAG attributes
Services
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Jumbo frame
EPL services
3-181
3 Boards
Board
Supports the following types of EVPL
services:
l EVPL services based on port
+VLAN
l EVPL services based on QinQ
EPLAN services
EVPLAN services
Encapsulation and
mapping
LAG
3-182
Encapsulation format
Maximum number of
VCTRUNKs supported
by the board
16
1xVC-4 (63xE1)
Maximum number of
E1s that can be bound
with a single
VCTRUNK
16xE1
Link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
Supported
Inter-board LAG
Not supported
Intra-board LAG
Supported
Supported
LPTa
Supported
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Traffic classification
Board
l Traffic classification based on
ports
l Traffic classification based on port
+VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port
+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI
l Traffic classification based on port
+S-VLAN ID
l Traffic classification based on port
+C-VLAN ID+S-VLAN ID
CoS
ETH OAM
CAR
Shaping
Queue scheduling
policies
Supports SP+WRR.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-183
3 Boards
Board
RMON
Supported
Port mirroring
Supported
Clock
Clock source
Synchronous Ethernet
Clock protection
OAM
Loopback
Supported
Board manufacturing
information query
Supported
Board temperature
detection
Supported
NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate
transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of
starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of
important data.
3-184
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
PDH signal
Ethernet
Encapsulation
unit
processing
unit
Logic
processing
unit
Mapping
unit
Management
control signal
GE signal
Cro ssconnectunit
Packet
switching unit
+3.3 V power
supplied to the board
Power
supply unit
Clock unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
l Receives/Transmits FE signals.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
Ethernet processing
unit
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Encapsulation unit
3-185
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Mapping unit
Logic processing
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Mapping unit
Encapsulation unit
Ethernet signal
processing unit
3-186
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
PROG
SRV
STAT
EFP8
Indicators
Table 3-172 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
3-187
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
Off
PROG
On (green)
On (red)
SRV
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
Ports
Table 3-173 Description of the ports on the EFP8
Port
FE1 to
FE8
3-188
Description
FE port
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
RJ45
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin
assignments for the ports, see Table 3-174 and Table 3-175. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-67.
Figure 3-67 Front view of the RJ45 connector
87654321
Table 3-174 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal
Function
TX+
TX-
RX+
Reserved
Reserved
RX-
Reserved
Reserved
Table 3-175 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal
Function
RX+
RX-
TX+
Reserved
Reserved
TX-
Reserved
3-189
3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal
Function
Reserved
The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-176.
Table 3-176 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
Off
On or blinking
Off
ACT (yellow)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 1
Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
3-190
Item
Description
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Related References
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames
A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern
Interface type
RJ-45
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-179 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
EFP8
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
0.6 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-191
3 Boards
3.13 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.
3.13.1 Version Description
The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
3.13.2 Functions and Features
The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3.13.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel.
3.13.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the
same as the physical slots.
3.13.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
3.13.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
3.13.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance,
board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Board
Basic functions
3-192
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Clock
Board
Linear MSP
Supported
SNCP
Supported
Clock source
Clock
protection
DCN
Outband DCN
Supported
OM
Loopback
Supported
Setting of the
on/off state of a
laser
Supported
ALS functiona
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Detection and
query of SFP
optical module
information
Supported
NOTE
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-193
3 Boards
Service bu s
Overhead bu s
Logic processing
unit
Overhead
processing unit
STM-1
STM-1
Control bu s
Logic control
unit
Power supplied to the
other units on the board
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
3-194
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Overhead processing
unit
Logic processing
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Overhead processing
unit
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-195
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX2/RX2
TX1/RX1
SL1D
SL1D
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Indicators
Table 3-183 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
3-196
On (green)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Indicator
LOS1
LOS2
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (red)
Off
On (red)
Off
Ports
Table 3-184 Description of the ports
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
TX1
LC (SFP)
Fiber jumper
RX1
TX2
RX2
LC (SFP)
3-197
3 Boards
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 1
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 1
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 10
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 8
Description
3-198
Feature Code
01
Ie-1
34060287
02
S-1.1
34060276
03
L-1.1
34060281
04
L-1.2
34060282
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Related References
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
Performance
155520
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Fiber type
Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Transmission distance
(km)
15
40
80
Operating wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10
10
8.2
10
10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-199
3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-188 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
0.30 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 3.4 W
3.14 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
3.14.1 Version Description
The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.
3.14.2 Functions and Features
The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.
3.14.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
3.14.5 Valid Slots
The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.
3.14.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
3.14.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3-200
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
ML1
MD1
Basic functions
E1 service categories
Port
specifications
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
Fractional E1
ATM/IMA
16
32
64
Maximum
number of ATM
connections
256
ATM traffic
management
Supported
ATM
encapsulation
mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Maximum
number of
concatenated
ATM cells
31
ATM OAM
Maximum
number of IMA
groups
16
32
3-201
3 Boards
Board
ML1
CES
MD1
Maximum
number of
members in an
IMA group
16
Maximum
number of
services
16
Encapsulation
mode
32
l CESoPSN
l SAToP
Service
category
Point-to-point services
Compression of
idle slots
Jitter buffering
time (us)
375-16000
Packet loading
time (us)
125-5000
CES ACR
Supported
Retiming
Supported
Clock protection
OM
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
3-202
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Service
bus
Logic
processing unit
Service
processing unit
E1
Signal
interface unit
E1
GE bus
Control bus
Logic
control unit
+3.3 V power
supplied to the board
Power
supply unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Service processing
unit
l Frames E1 signals.
l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-203
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Service processing
unit
3-204
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
ML1
STAT
SRV
MD1
STAT
SRV
32
17
Indicators
Table 3-192 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
3-205
3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
Off
Ports
Table 3-193 Description of the ports on the ML1
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16
Anea 96
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16
Anea 96
17 to 32
The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
Anea 96
The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-77 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-195 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-77 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
3-206
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
10
34
11
35
12
36
13
37
14
38
15
39
16
40
17
41
18
42
3-207
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
19
43
20
44
21
45
22
46
23
47
24
48
49
73
50
74
51
75
52
76
53
77
54
78
55
79
56
80
3-208
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Slot
6
(FAN)
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 10
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Description
75
120
Related References
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-209
3 Boards
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-198 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-199 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
ML1
MD1
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
Weight
0.45 kg
0.50 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W
Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W
3.15 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.15.1 Version Description
The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.
3.15.2 Functions and Features
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
3.15.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
3-210
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
SP3S
Basic functions
Port
specifications
75-ohm/120ohm E1 port
16
Clock
Clock source
Clock
protection
E1 retiming
function
Supported
Loopback
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
OM
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
SP3D
32
3-211
3 Boards
Logic processing
unit
Mapping/
Demapping unit
Codec unit
E1
E1 signal
Interface unit
E1
Cross-connect unit
Control bus
Logic
control
unit
+3.3 V power
supplied to the board
-48 V1
Power
supply unit
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Interface unit
Codec unit
3-212
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Step
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Mapping/
Demapping unit
Logic processing
unit
Function Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Mapping/
Demapping unit
Codec unit
Interface unit
3-213
3 Boards
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
SP3S
SP3S
STAT
SRV
21
1
42
22
SP3D
SP3D
STAT
SRV
Indicators
Table 3-203 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
3-214
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
SRV
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
Ports
Table 3-204 Description of the ports on the SP3S
Port
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-16
Anea 96
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-21
Anea 96
22-42
The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
Anea 96
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 910, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1
signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-215
3 Boards
The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-83 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-206 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-83 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1
POS.96
3-216
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
10
34
11
35
12
36
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
13
37
14
38
15
39
16
40
17
41
18
42
19
43
20
44
21
45
22
46
23
47
24
48
49
73
50
74
51
75
52
76
53
77
54
78
55
79
3-217
3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
56
80
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 8
Description
3-218
120
75
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Related References
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces
A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-209 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-210 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
SP3S
SP3D
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
Weight
0.50 kg
0.64 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-219
3 Boards
3.16 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.
3.16.1 Version Description
The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.
3.16.2 Functions and Features
The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and
information reporting.
3.16.3 Working Principle
The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication
control unit.
3.16.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
3.16.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS is the same as the
physical slot.
3.16.6 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
Protection
3-220
Board
Power access
Power output
Protection
Power
protection
Surge
protection
Supported
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
Supported
Protection and
detection unit
EMI filtering
unit
-48 V/-60 V
Protection and
detection unit
EMI filtering
unit
Detection
signal
-48 V 1
-48 V 2
Board operating in distributed
power supply mode
Detection
signal
Communication
control unit
Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm.
Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
3-221
3 Boards
PIU temperature
PWRA
PWRB
PIU
-48V
-60V
Indicators
Table 3-212 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Indicator
Status
Description
PWRA
On (green)
Off
On (green)
Off
PWRB
Ports
The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 3-213 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and
their respective usage.
3-222
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Port
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
NEG1
(-)
-48 V power
input port
RTN1
(+)
BGND power
input port
NEG2
(-)
-48 V power
input port
RTN2
(+)
BGND power
input port
Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power
operations.
CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power
supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU)
Slot 4
Slot 1
Figure 3-89 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 4
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
3-223
3 Boards
Performance
Dimensions
Weight
0.12 kg
Power consumption
< 0.5 W
Input voltage
-38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.17 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.
3.17.1 Version Description
The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.
3.17.2 Functions and Features
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
3.17.3 Working Principle
The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
3.17.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
3.17.5 Valid Slots
The FAN can be inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
3.17.6 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3 Boards
Board
Power input
Number of fans
Supported
Protection
OM
Fan unit
12 V
12 V
Power unit
12 V
Communication
detection signal
Communication
monitoring unit
Communication
detection signal
Power Unit
l
Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, and overcurrent
protection.
Fan Unit
Three air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
3-225
3 Boards
Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width
modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-216.
Table 3-216 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed
Working Temperature
Rotating Speed
25C
3200 rounds/minute
25C to 60C
60C
16000 rounds/minute
Indicators
Table 3-217 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN
3-226
Indicator
State
Meaning
FAN
On (green)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (red)
Off
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l
Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.
Slot 5 Slot 6
(FAN)
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 4
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Item
Performance
Dimensions
3-227
3 Boards
Item
Performance
Weight
0.200 kg
Power consumption
3-228
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
4 Accessories
Accessories
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
4-1
4 Accessories
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel
provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
1-8
9-16
Ports
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel
Port
Description
Connector Type
T1-T16
BNC
R1-R16
1-8
9-16
Grounding bolt
DB37
NOTE
Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides
the pin assignments for the E1 port.
4-2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
4 Accessories
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
36
35
17
16
34
33
15
14
32
31
13
12
4-3
4 Accessories
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
30
29
11
10
Others
Reserved
4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of a PDU.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default
mode.
OUTPUT
ON
OUTPUT
ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OFF
20A
OFF
INPUT
20A
4-4
2. PGND terminals
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
4 Accessories
Ports
Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU
Position
Port
Description
Output power
terminals (A)
PGND
terminals
Wiring terminal
for a two-hole
OT terminal
Input power
terminals
RTN1(+)
RTN2(+)
NEG1(-)
NEG2(-)
Output power
terminals (B)
Power
switches (A)
20 A
Power
switches (B)
20 A
Functions
l
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
4-5
4 Accessories
Working Principle
A PDU consists of input terminals, output terminals, and circuit breakers and it performs simple
distribution operations for the input power.
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
OUTPUT A
+
SW1
SW2
INPUT
+
+
SW3
RTN1(+)
BGND
SW4
RTN2(+)
1
2
3
4
OUTPUT B
+
NEG1(-)
BGND
SW1
NEG2(-)
SW2
+
+
SW4
PGND
SW4
1
2
3
4
4-6
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
4 Accessories
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
4-7
5 Cables
Cables
5-1
5 Cables
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
5-2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5-3
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
5-4
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5-5
5 Cables
Cable
Terminal
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 910, power cables with a 2.5 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance
of 50 m.
5-6
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
Main label
1
Cable tie
H.S.tube
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5-7
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
Main label
1
L
Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignments
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is
connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected
to the IF board.
NOTE
5-8
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1
H.S.tube 2 PCS
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male
Pin Assignments
None.
XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two
XPIC boards in the horizontal direction.
XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect
two XPIC boards in the vertical direction. These XPIC cables are also used to connect the
X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.
The OptiX RTN 910 uses XPIC cables with angle connectors.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5-9
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable
1
L1
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male
Pin Assignments
None.
Connector 2
Cable
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC
SC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC
LC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 910, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.
5-10
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5-11
5 Cables
5.6 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment
An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
5-12
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Main label
1
W
X1
ViewA
Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female
Pos.1
Pin Assignments
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
W
Core
Serial
No.
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Remark
s
Pin
R0
R1
R2
R3
Remark
s
Core
Serial
No.
25
Tip
T0
26
Ring
27
Tip
T1
28
Ring
29
Tip
T2
30
Ring
31
Tip
T3
5-13
5 Cables
Pin
W
Core
5-14
Ring
Tip
10
Ring
11
Tip
12
Ring
13
Tip
14
Ring
15
Tip
16
Ring
18
Ring
17
Tip
20
Ring
19
Tip
22
Ring
21
Tip
24
Ring
23
Tip
50
Ring
49
Tip
52
Ring
51
Tip
54
Ring
53
Tip
56
Ring
55
Shell
Serial
No.
Remark
s
Pin
W
Core
32
Ring
33
Tip
34
Ring
35
Tip
36
Ring
37
Tip
38
Ring
39
Tip
40
Ring
42
Ring
41
Tip
44
Ring
43
Tip
46
Ring
45
Tip
48
Ring
47
Tip
74
Ring
73
Tip
76
Ring
75
Tip
78
Ring
75
Tip
80
Ring
Tip
79
Tip
Braid
Shell
Braid
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
Serial
No.
Remark
s
10
T4
12
T5
14
T6
16
T7
18
T8
20
T9
22
T10
24
T11
26
T12
28
T13
30
T14
32
T15
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Pin
Blue
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
White
R0
Blue
Twiste
d pair
White
R1
Green
Twiste
d pair
White
R2
Grey
Twiste
d pair
Red
R3
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
Red
R4
10
Brown
Twiste
d pair
11
Black
R5
12
Blue
Twiste
d pair
13
Black
R6
14
Green
Twiste
d pair
15
Black
Twiste
d pair
R7
16
Grey
17
White
18
Blue
19
White
20
Green
21
White
22
Grey
23
Red
Twiste
d pair
R8
Twiste
d pair
R9
Twiste
d pair
R10
Twiste
d pair
R11
Orang
e
Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Blue
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
25
White
T0
26
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
27
White
T1
28
Brown
Twiste
d pair
29
Red
T2
30
Blue
Twiste
d pair
31
Red
T3
32
Green
Twiste
d pair
33
Red
T4
34
Grey
Twiste
d pair
35
Black
T5
36
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
37
Black
T6
38
Brown
Twiste
d pair
39
Yello
w
Twiste
d pair
T7
40
Blue
41
White
T8
42
Orang
e
Twiste
d pair
43
White
T9
44
Brown
Twiste
d pair
45
Red
T10
46
Blue
Twiste
d pair
47
Red
Twiste
d pair
T11
Orang
e
5-15
5 Cables
Pin
W
Color
of the
Core
24
Orang
e
49
Red
50
Brown
51
Black
52
Blue
53
Black
54
Green
55
Black
56
Shell
Relati
onshi
p
Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Pin
W
Color
of the
Core
48
Green
73
Red
74
Grey
75
Black
76
Orang
e
77
Black
78
Brown
79
Yello
w
Grey
80
Blue
Braid
Shell
Braid
Twiste
d pair
R12
Twiste
d pair
R13
Twiste
d pair
R14
Twiste
d pair
R15
Relati
onshi
p
Rema
rks
Twiste
d pair
T12
Twiste
d pair
T13
Twiste
d pair
T14
Twiste
d pair
T15
Tape
Color
5-16
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel
Pin Assignments
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37
connector
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Wire
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
W1
X1.2
X2.20
R0
X1.10
X2.36
R4
X1.1
X2.2
X1.9
X2.17
X1.26
X2.21
X1.34
X2.35
X1.25
X2.3
X1.33
X2.16
X1.4
X2.22
X1.12
X2.34
X1.3
X2.4
X1.11
X2.15
X1.28
X2.23
X1.36
X2.33
X1.27
X2.5
X1.35
X2.14
X1.6
X2.24
X1.14
X2.32
T0
R1
T1
R2
T4
R5
T5
R6
5-17
5 Cables
Wire
W2
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
X1.5
X2.6
X1.30
X2.25
X1.29
X2.7
X1.8
X2.26
X1.7
X2.8
X1.32
X2.27
X1.31
X2.9
X1.18
X3.20
X1.17
X3.2
X1.42
X3.21
X1.41
X3.3
X1.20
X3.22
X1.19
X3.4
X1.44
X3.23
X1.43
X3.5
X1.22
X3.24
X1.21
X3.6
X1.46
X3.25
X1.45
X3.7
X1.24
X3.26
X1.23
X3.8
X1.48
X3.27
X1.47
Shell
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
X1.13
X2.13
X1.38
X2.31
X1.37
X2.12
X1.16
X2.30
X1.15
X2.11
X1.40
X2.29
X1.39
X2.10
X1.50
X3.36
X1.49
X3.17
X1.74
X3.35
X1.73
X3.16
X1.52
X3.34
X1.51
X3.15
X1.76
X3.33
X1.75
X3.14
X1.54
X3.32
X1.53
X3.13
X1.78
X3.31
X1.77
X3.12
X1.56
X3.30
X1.55
X3.11
X1.80
X3.29
X3.9
X1.79
X3.10
Braid
Shell
Braid
T2
R3
T3
R8
T8
R9
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
Remarks
T6
R7
T7
R12
T12
R13
T13
R14
T14
R15
T15
5-18
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable
1
Main label
6
X1
X2
Pin Assignments
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Function
X1.3
X2.3
Tip
X1.4
X2.4
Ring
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+
TX-
BIDA-
RX+
BIDB+
5-19
5 Cables
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
Reserved
BIDC+
Reserved
BIDC-
RX-
BIDB-
Reserved
BIDD+
Reserved
BIDD-
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
BIDB+
RX-
BIDB-
TX+
BIDA+
Reserved
BIDD+
Reserved
BIDD-
TX-
BIDA-
Reserved
BIDC+
Reserved
BIDC-
Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used
between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and
crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM port, NE port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN 910
support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and crossover
5-20
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
5 Cables
cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical service
ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Network cable
1
Label 2
Pin Assignments
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.1
X2.1
White/Orange
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White/Green
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.6
X2.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X1.3
X2.1
White/Orange
X1.1
X2.3
White/Green
X1.2
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
5-21
5 Cables
5-22
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Relation
Twisted pair
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameters Description
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-1
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.
A-2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Address Type
IP Address of GNE
NSAP Address
IP Address Range of GNE
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address
of GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-3
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Search Address
User Name
Password
A-4
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected
Deselected
l To create NEs in
batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE
after search. The NEs
are automatically
created after they are
found.
Deselected
NE User
l This parameter
specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Password
l This parameter
specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-5
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter
specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
Deselected
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE ID
GNE Address
GNE ID
Created As GNE
Yes
Yes
l This parameter
specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.
No
A-6
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Mode
Common
Common
The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Security SSL
Port
1400
NE Status
Created
Uncreated
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Type
ID
1 to 49135
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-7
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Extended ID
1 to 254
Name
l This parameter
specifies the name of
the NE.
l After you have
specified the name of
the NE, the name is
displayed under the
icon of the NE.
Remarks
Gateway Type
Non-Gateway
Non-Gateway
Gateway
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol
IP
IP
OSI
A-8
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
Connection Mode
Common
Common
The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Security SSL
Port
1400
NE User
Password
NSAP Address
Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-9
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
New ID
1 to 254
New Extended ID
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
NE ID
A-10
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronous Mode
Standard NTP
Null
NM
Null
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE ID
NE ID
l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to IP.
IP
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the HWECC
protocol, this
parameter is set to NE
ID.
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the IP
protocol, this
parameter is set to IP.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-11
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE,
this parameter is set to
the ID or IP address of
the gateway NE.
0 to 1024
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronization
Starting Time
l This parameter
specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
A-12
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DST
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter
indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
Deselected
1 to 300
l This parameter
indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
TimeZone
DST
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-13
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time Zone
DST
Selected
Deselected
Deselected
1 to 120
Offset
WEEK
Unit: minute(s)
Start Rule
WEEK
DATE
Start Time
End Rule
WEEK
WEEK
DATE
End Time
Navigation Path
A-14
1.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Key
1 to 1024
l This parameter
indicates the key for
NTP authentication.
l This parameter is set
according to the
requirements of the
external NTP server.
Password
l This parameter
indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.
l This parameter is set
according to the
requirements of the
external NTP server.
Yes
Trusted
Yes
No
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-15
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
File Type
Capacity
Load
Yes
No
Navigation Path
1.
On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2.
Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
.
then click
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
NE Type
Operation Type
Auto Disabling
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
A-16
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Disabling
Time(min)
1 to 2880
A-17
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
Gateway IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
255.255.0.0
Extended ID
1 to 254
A-18
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Mode
Common + Security
SSL
Common + Security
SSL
Common
Security SSL
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-19
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Channel
D1-D3
D4-D12
D1-D12
D1-D1
DCC Resources
Communication
Status
Protocol Type
HWECC
HWECC
TCP/IP
OSI
A-20
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAPD Role
User
User
Network
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click Create.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Timeslot/
Porta
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-21
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Source Port
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
Sink Timeslot/
Porta
A-22
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Sink Port
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ECC Extended
Mode
Auto mode
Auto mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Specified mode
A-23
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP
Port
1601 to 1699
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Opposite IP
0.0.0.0
Port
1601 to 1699
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
A-24
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination NE
Transfer NE
Distance
0 to 64
Level
Manual
Mode
Automatic
SCC No.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-25
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Protocol
DIRECT
STATIC
OSPF
RIP
OSPF_ASE
OSPF_NSSA
A-26
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Interface
Metric
0 to 65535
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Address
Subnet Mask
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-27
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Gateway
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
OSPF Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Area
0.0.0.0
1 to 255
10
A-28
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DCC Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
40
DCC
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535
DCC Delay(s)
1 to 3600
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-29
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
1 to 255
10
LAN Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
40
LAN
Retransmission
Timer(s)
A-30
1 to 65535
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN Delay(s)
1 to 3600
OSPF Status
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
STUB Area
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
NSSA Area
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Direct route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Static route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
RIP route
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-31
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN Interface
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Proxy ARP
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
A-32
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Path Type
OSPF Status
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-33
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configuration Role
ES
L1
L1
L2
Current Role
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Adjacency No.
Adjacency Type
A-34
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Adjacency State
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination Area
ID
Destination SYSID
Metric
Adjacency No.1
Adjacency No.2
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-35
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address
LAPD Actor
User
User
Network
Configurable
LAPD Enable
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
LAPD Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address
L2 Wait Time to
Retry(s)
1 to 20
A-36
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 Retry Times
2 to 6
L3 Hello Timer(s)
1 to 100
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-37
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 ES Timer(s)
1 to 200
50
L3 IS Timer(s)
1 to 200
10
A-38
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 Hold Timer(s)
2 to 63
1 to 63
COST
20
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-39
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Ethernet Board
VLAN ID
2 to 4094
4094
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
64 to 1000
512
E1 Port
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
Tunnel Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)
IF Port Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)
64 to 1000
512
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
A-40
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabled Status
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
Protocol Type
IP
IP
HWECC
Navigation Path
l
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-41
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
Enabled Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
IP Address
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected
Selected
Access Command
Line
Selected
Deselected
A-42
Deselected
Deselected
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Access NM
Selected
Selected
9600
Deselected
Baud Rate
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Navigation Path
1.
Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
NE User
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-43
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
User Level
NE User Flag
Displays whether a
registered NE user is
logged in.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful.
2.
3.
Click Add.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE User
A-44
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
User Level
Monitor Level
Monitor Level
Operation Level
Maintenance Level
System Level
Debug Level
l A Debug Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities, and has the
right to run debugging
commands.
l A System Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities.
l A Maintenance
Level NE user has
some security
authorities, some
configuration
authorities, the
communication setting
authority, and the log
management
authority.
l An Operation Level
NE user has all fault
performance
authorities, some
security authorities,
and some
configuration
authorities.
l A Monitor Level NE
user has the right to use
all query commands, to
log in, to log out, and to
change its own
password.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-45
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE User Flag
LCT NE User
LCT NE User
EMS NE User
l LCT NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the U2000 Local Craft
Terminal (U2000
LCT).
CMD NE User
General NE User
l EMS NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the U2000.
l CMD NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the CMD.
l General NE User
indicates NE users for
all NMS types.
Detailed Description
Describes a configured
NE user.
New Password
Confirm Password
Yes
Yes
No
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
A-46
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LCT Access
Control Switch
Access Allowed
Access Allowed
Disable Access
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-47
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel
Bandwidth
28M
40M
56M
NOTE
The IFX2 board does not support the value
40M.
Polarization
direction-V
1 to 4094
Polarization
direction-H
Link ID-V
Link ID-H
A-48
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Power
(dBm)
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-49
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute
A-50
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
-45.0
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-70.0
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-51
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
Polarization
direction-V
Link ID-V
Polarization
direction-H
Link ID-H
IF Channel
Bandwidth
28M
40M
56M
A-52
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received -V(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-53
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received -H(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
A-54
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Power
(dBm)
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-55
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
Transmission
Status
unmute
unmute
mute
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
Polarization
direction
A-56
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-57
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Transmit-End
Modulation Mode
Receive-End
Modulation Mode
Guarantee E1
Capacity
Full E1 Capacity
1 to 75
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
A-58
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-59
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR time(s)
300 to 720
600
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
A-60
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping
Direction
Work Unit
Work Unit
Protection Unit
Mapped Board
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-61
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Enable
Enabled
Disabled
Protocol Status
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
Line
Switching Status
Protected Unit
Remote/Local End
Indication
Navigation Path
A-62
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
HSB
HSB
FD
SD
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive Mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-63
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Working Board
Protection Board
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A-64
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID
Working Mode
HSB
FD
SD
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-65
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Disabled
A-66
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switching Status of
Device
Switching Status of
Channel
Active Board of
Device
Active Board of
Channel
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio hop.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Unit
Slot Mapping
Relation
Working Status of
Device
Signal Status of
Channel
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-67
A Parameters Description
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Work Mode
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
A-68
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Link ID
1 to 4094
Received Link ID
IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH)
SDH
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-69
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel
Bandwidth
7M
14M
28M
40M
NOTE
56M
AM Mode
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
A-70
QPSK
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
STM-1 Capacity
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-71
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guarantee E1
Capacity
Guarantee E1
Capacity Range
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
Enable E1 Priority
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
A-72
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Full E1 Capacity
Full E1 Capacity
Range
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Frequency
(MHz)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-73
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Range of TX
Frequency(MHz)
Actual TX
Frequency(MHz)
Actual RX
Frequency(MHz)
T/R Spacing(MHz)
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
A-74
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Power(dBm)
Range of TX
Power(dBm)
Actual TX Power
(dBm)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-75
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
Actual RX Power
(dBm)
TX Status
Unmute
Unmute
Mute
A-76
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Equipment Information
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frequency(GHz)
Equip Type
Station Type
Produce SN
Transmission
Power Type
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-77
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
1+1 Protection
1+1 Protection
1:N Protection
Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
Single-Ended
Switching (1+1
Protection)
Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
Protection)
A-78
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive (1+1
Protection)
Revertive (1:N
Protection)
Revertive
300 to 720
600
SD Enable
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-79
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
New Protocol
New Protocol
Restructure Protocol
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping
Direction
Select Mapping
Mode
West Protection
Unit
A-80
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID
Protection Type
Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-81
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive
300 to 720
SD Enable
Enabled
Disabled
A-82
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
New Protocol
Restructure Protocol
Protection Subnet
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
West Line
West Switching
Status
Protected Unit
Remote/Local End
Indication
When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-83
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
A-84
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.
Click Create.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
VC12
VC3
VC4
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Source Slot
Source VC4
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-85
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Slot
Sink VC4
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
E1 Priority
High
Low
None
Yes
No
Yes
A-86
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
l
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-87
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive
A-88
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
Source Slot
Source VC4
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Sink Slot
Sink VC4
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-89
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Selected
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Deselected
Deselected
Selected
Activate
Immediately
Deselected
Selected
Navigation Path
A-90
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Rightclick the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.
3.
Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
Direction
Unidirectional
Level
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-91
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive
A-92
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
Source Slot
Source VC4
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Sink Slot
Sink VC4
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-93
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Activate
Immediately
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
A-94
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Cross-Connection Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
VC3
VC4
Source Timeslot/
Path
Sink Slot
Sink Timeslot/
Path
E1 Priority
High
Low
None
Yes
No
Bound Group
Number
Lockout Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-95
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Trail Name
Schedule No.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
VC3
VC4
Source Timeslot/
Path
Sink Slot
Sink Timeslot/
Path
Lockout Status
Trail Name
Schedule No.
A-96
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Control from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
Source
Sink
Level
VC12
VC3
VC4
Revertive Mode
Revertive
Non-Revertive
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-97
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100
A-98
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Initiation
Condition
TIM
Null
EXC
SD
UNEQ
Null
Service Grouping
Active Channel
Trail Name
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered
Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-99
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
High Channel
Low Channel
Insert TU_AIS to
E1_AIS
Enable
Disable
Disable
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Port Mode
Configuration from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
Service Mode
CES
CES
PDH
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-101
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the ID of a
service port.
Name
Port Mode
Layer 1
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 3
l Displays
Encapsulation Type
of a PDH port.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 1,
Encapsulation Type
takes its default value
Null.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2,
Encapsulation Type
takes its default value
ATM.
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Frame Format
Unframe
CRC-4 Multiframe
Double Frame
CRC-4 Multiframe
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-103
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Mode
Master Mode
Master Mode
Slave Mode
System Clock Mode
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
A-104
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Impedance
Frame Mode
30
31
l 30 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 15 and 17
to 31 are used to
transmit service data,
and timeslot 16 is used
to transmit signaling.
31
l 31 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 31 are
used to transmit
service data.
l This parameter is
unavailable if Frame
Format is Unframe.
l The port frame modes
need to be the same at
the local and opposite
ends.
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings
A-105
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Name
Enable Port
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies whether an
Ethernet port is
enabled. An Ethernet
port can receive,
process, and forward
Ethernet services only
if this parameter is set
to Enabled.
Disabled
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 2
Layer 3
A-106
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation Type
Null
l This parameter
specifies the method of
the port to process the
received packets.
802.1Q
QinQ
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-107
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
A-108
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description
duplex, and autonegotiation.
l GE optical ports
support 1000M fullduplex and autonegotiation.
NOTE
Port 10 of the EFP8 board
does not support this
parameter.
The logical EM6X board
does not support halfduplex.
1518 to 9600
1522
Auto-Negotiation
Ability
Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
l This parameter
specifies the autonegotiation capability
of the Ethernet port.
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
Optical Port
Electrical Port
l This parameter
specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
l The SFP on the EM6F
board supports the
optical port and
electrical port.
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-109
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
A-110
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
l This parameter
specifies the QinQ
type domain.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed
as FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain
should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6F board or the
EM4T/EM4F/EM6X
logical board.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-111
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
l This parameter
specifies the TAG flag
of a port. For details
about the TAG flags
and associated frameprocessing methods,
see Table A-2.
Access
Hybrid
1 to 4094
A-112
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN Priority
0 to 7
Ingress UNI
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Untagged frame
A-113
A Parameters Description
Port
Egress UNI
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
A-114
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Tunnel
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer 3
in the General
Attributes tab.
Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified
IP Address
0.0.0.0
l Specifies the IP
address of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-115
A Parameters Description
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Physical
Parameters
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
Inloop
l In normal cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the PHY layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet physical
signals transmitted to
the opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
A-116
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
Transmitting Rate(kbit/
s)
Receiving Rate(kbit/s)
Loopback Check
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Loopback Port
Shutdown
Enabled
Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
limit the traffic rate of
the broadcast packets
according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in
the total packets.
When the equipment at
the opposite end may
encounter a broadcast
storm, this parameter
is set to Enabled.
Disabled
Enabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-117
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
0 to 100
30
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
A-118
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Name
Level
l Specifies or displays
the serial port level.
l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/
s timeslots of E1
signals can be bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910
supports 64K Timeslot
only.
Used Port
64K Timeslot
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 3
l Displays or specifies
the port mode.
Layer 3
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-119
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Number(e.g:1,3-6)
Name
Level
64K Timeslot
64K Timeslot
Used Board
Used Port
High Channel
Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6)
64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Name
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 2
Layer 3
Null
802.1Q
QinQ
802.1Q
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-121
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MTU (byte)
1518 to 9600
1522
Related Concepts
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
QinQ Type
Domain
A-122
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
1 to 4094
VLAN Priority
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ingress Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
A-123
A Parameters Description
Status
Egress Port
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Untagged frame
Tagged frame
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not "Default
VLAN ID", the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
Related Concepts
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the
corresponding IF port.
A-124
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Tunnel
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer
3 in the General
Attributes tab.
Specify IP Address
Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified
IP Address
0.0.0.0
l Specifies the IP
address for a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask
255.255.255.252
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-125
A Parameters Description
Related Concepts
3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
Received Radio
Link ID
A-126
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Port Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Error Frame
Discard Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
MAC Address
Transmitting Rate
(Kbit/s)
Receiving Rate
(Kbit/s)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-127
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Speed
Transmission at
L3
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Loopback Check
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Loopback Port
Shutdown
A-128
Disabled
Enabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
30
Related Concepts
3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-129
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
A-130
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Service Type
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH)
SDH
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
Received Radio
Link ID
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-131
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Port Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
2M Wayside Input
Boarda
350 MHz
Consecutive Wave
Status
Stop
Start
Stop
A-132
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
XPIC Enabledb
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
NOTE
l a. The IFU2, IFX2, ISU2, and ISX2 boards do not support way-side services.
l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
IF Channel
Bandwidth
7M
14M
28M
40M
56M
NOTE
l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
7M, 14M, and 40M.
l The ISX2 board does not support the values
7M and 14M.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-133
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK
A-134
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Manually
Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
STM-1 Capacity
Enable E1 Priority
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Guarantee E1
Capacity
Guarantee E1
Capacity Range
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-135
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
Full E1 Capacity
Full E1 Capacity
Transmit-End
Modulation Mode
Receive-End
Modulation Mode
Guarantee AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
Full AM Service
Capacity(Mbit/s)
Transmitted AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
Received AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
E1 Capacity For
High Priority
A-136
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Related Concepts
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
-45.0
A-137
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-70.0
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
ATPC Lower
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
Related Concepts
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
A-138
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
l
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface
from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Modulation Mode
E1 Capacity
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
Related Concepts
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-139
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Event NO.
Adjustment Time
Adjustment
Direction
Switchover
Transmitted
Power(dBm)
Received Power
(dBm)
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
A-140
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Cross
Cross
Tributary
1 to 255
Measured Time
10min
h
Start Time
Progress
Total PRBS
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
Deselected
A-141
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
A-142
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
Actual Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
Actual Receive
Frequency(MHz)
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
The range of
frequency point
(MHz)
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-143
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
Transmit Power
(dBm)
A-144
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0
-10.0
TX High
Threshold(dBm)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-145
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Low Threshold
(dBm)
RX High
Threshold(dBm)
A-146
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
RX Low Threshold
(dBm)
Actual Transmit
Power(dBm)
Description
value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
Actual Receive
Power(dBm)
Actual range of
Power(dBm)
Transmission
Power Type
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-147
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Frequency(GHz)
Equipment Type
T/R Spacing(MHz)
Intermediate
Frequency
Bandwidth (MHz)
IF Bandwidth
Type
Station Type
Transmission
Power Type
Produce Time
Produce SN
Navigation Path
A-148
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
RF Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Configure
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
Actual
Transmission
Status
Factory
Information
Remarks
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-149
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Optical Interface
Namea
Laser Switcha
On
On
Off
A-150
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Optical(Electrical)
Interface
Loopbacka
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
VC4 Loopbackb
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-151
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Optical Interface
Automatic
Shutdown
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
1000 to 3000
2000
Off Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
60000
2000 to 300000
90000
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Select By Board/Port(Channel).
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Name
Tributary
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Port Impedance
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-153
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Load
Indication
Load
Load
Non-Loaded
Normal
Normal
Retiming Mode of
Tributary Clock
Retiming Mode of
Cross-Connect
Clock
A-154
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Input Signal
Equalization
Unequalized
Unequalized
Equalized
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Direction
Cross
Cross
Tributary
1 to 255
Measured Time
10min
h
Start Time
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-155
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Progress
Total PRBS
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
Deselected
Navigation Path
1.
Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
A-156
Deselected
Deselected
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
J0 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
J0 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]
J0 Received
([Mode]Content)
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Deselected
Deselected
A-157
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
J1 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
J1 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]
J1 Received
([Mode]Content)
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
C2 to be Sent
C2 to be Received
C2 Received
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
A-158
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VC4 Overhead
Termination
Termination
Auto
Pass-Through
Auto
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Deselected
Deselected
A-159
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
J2 to be Sent
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
J2 to be Received
[Disabled]
J2 Received
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
A-160
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
Service Name
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
l This parameter
specifies the
transparent
transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
It is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
Transparently
Transmitted
A-162
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-163
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
A-164
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-165
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VLANs
1 to 4094
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
Service Name
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
A-166
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(byte)
Source Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-167
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
PRI
Bearer Type
QinQ Link
PW
PW
A-168
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection
PW APS
Slave Protection Pair
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
Service Name
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(byte)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-169
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
A-170
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bearer Type
QinQ Link
PW
PW
QinQ Link ID
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
Service Name
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(byte)
Bearer Type 1
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
QinQ Link ID 1
Bearer Type 2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
A-171
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID 2
QinQ Link ID
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters
of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working
PW as an example.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
PW Type
Ethernet
Ethernet
l PW Type indicates
whether P-TAG is
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated for
transmission on PWs.
If it is not required to
add VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to
Ethernet. If it is
required to add VLAN
IDs, set this parameter
to Ethernet Tagged
Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attributes
tab.
Direction
A-172
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Encapsulation Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the
encapsulation type of the
packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
16 to 1048575
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Tunnel
A tunnel needs to be
selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Opposite LSR ID
Egress Tunnel
QoS Parameters
NOTE
QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-173
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Policy
CIR(Kbit/s)
CBS(byte)
PIR(Kbit/s)
PBS(byte)
EXP
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
A-174
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
No Use
No Use
None
Alert Label
Alert Label
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
None
Request VLAN
TPID
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
PW APS.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-175
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
Protection Group ID
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Switching Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter
specifies whether to
switch services back to
the original working
PW after it recovers.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Nonrevertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
A-176
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12
0 to 100
Detection mode
OAM Parameters
NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of
PWs is set to PW APS.
l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management >
PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-177
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval specified
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value AutoSensing is
recommended.
A-178
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
FFD
3.3
50
10
20
50
100
200
500
PW ID to be Received
Specifies the PW ID to be
received.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-179
A Parameters Description
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
Slave Protection Pair.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode
Protection Group ID
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
Service Name
Source Node
A-180
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Node
MTU(byte)
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
Deployment Status
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-181
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLANs
1 to 4094
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Working Status
A-182
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Status
Displays whether a PW is
enabled.
PW Signaling Type
PW Type
Direction
PW Encapsulation Type
Displays the PW
encapsulation type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses
MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Tunnel
Opposite LSR ID
Control Word
VCCV Verification
Mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-183
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Compositive Working
Status
Displays the
comprehensive working
status of the PW.
Request VLAN
Deployment Status
Tunnel Automatic
Selection Policy
TPID
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295
l This parameter
indicates the QinQ link
ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
Port
l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
A-184
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN ID
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction
is set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
l This parameter is
preset in QinQ Link.
QoS Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Direction
Bandwidth Limit
Displays or specifies
whether the bandwidth
limit function is enabled
for a PW to prevent
network congestion.
l Regarding
transmission channels,
this function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3
service corresponds to
a PW. Therefore, this
function can also limit
the bandwidth of ETH
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-185
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy
CIR (Kbit/s)
CBS (kbyte)
PIR (kbit/s)
PBS (kbyte)
EXP
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
A-186
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Port
l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the port.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
Encapsulation Type
Null
802.1Q
QinQ
l This parameter
indicates the
encapsulation type of
the port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
l If this parameter is set
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If this parameter is set
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
l If this parameter is set
to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
TAG
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
l This parameter
indicates the tag of the
port.
l This parameter is
preset in Layer 2
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface .
A-187
A Parameters Description
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Protection Mode
Enabling Status
Enabled
l Displays or specifies
the enabling status of
the PW protection
group.
Disabled
A-188
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
l Specifies whether to
switch services to the
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
Revertive
1 to 12
l Displays or specifies
the WTR time of the
protection group.
l When the preset WTR
time expires after the
original working PW
recovers, services are
switched to the
original working PW.
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
0 to 100
l Displays or specifies
the hold-off time of the
protection group.
l If this parameter is set
to a value other than 0,
the protection group
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but waits
until the hold-off time
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist. If any
faults persist, the
switching is triggered;
otherwise, no
switching is triggered.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-189
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Deployment Status
Switchover Status
Protocol Status
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
DNI PW ID
PW Type
Deployment Status
A-190
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
V-UNI
V-UNI
Source Interface
Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094
V-UNI
V-UNI
Sink Interface
Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
A-191
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.
Service Name
BPDU
l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an ELAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
A-192
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
l C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
l S-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to SAwared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to TagTransparent.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-193
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
Disabled
l This parameter
indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
Deployment Status
MTU(byte)
A-194
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
SVLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-195
A Parameters Description
Parameters of NNIs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
A-196
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-197
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.
Service Name
BPDU
l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an ELAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
A-198
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
l C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
l S-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to SAwared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to SAwared.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-199
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC selflearning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC selflearning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
l This parameter
indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
MTU(byte)
Deployment Status
A-200
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
SVLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l If this parameter is set
to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port.
That is, the entire port
is mounted to the
bridge.
l If this parameter is set
to a non-null value,
only the
corresponding UNI
port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-201
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
A-202
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset
static MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
MAC Address
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address
is an address that is set
manually. It is not
aged automatically
and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
Egress Interface
l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-203
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset selflearning MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
MAC Address
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the self-learning MAC
address. A selflearning MAC address
is also called a
dynamic MAC
address.
l A self-learning MAC
address is an entry
obtained by a bridge in
SVL or IVL learning
mode. A self-learning
MAC address can be
aged.
Egress Interface
l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A-204
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Aging Ability
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Aging Time(min)
1 to 65535
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-205
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
l This parameter
specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.
l This parameter is used
for discarding an
entry, also called a
black hole entry,
whose data frame that
contains a specific
destination MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address needs to
be set manually and
cannot be aged.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Type
Unicast
Broadcast
Multicast
Handing Mode
Discard
Broadcast
A-206
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-207
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Association Name
CC Test Transmit
Period
1s
1s
10s
1m
10m
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
Maintenance
Association Name
Node
VLAN
MEP ID
1 to 2048
Direction
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
CC Status
Active
Inactive
Active
A-208
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295
Board
Port
S-Vlan ID
1 to 4094
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A-209
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
2.
Click New.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8
l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
A-210
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
East Port
West Port
Yes
No
l This parameter
specifies whether the
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
No
l This parameter
specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or
west port on the RPL
owner node.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-211
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node
01-19-A7-00-00-01
01-19-A7-00-00-01
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
A-212
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8
East Port
West Port
Yes
RPL Port
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
No
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-213
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination Node
01-19-A7-00-00-01
Hold-Off Time(ms)
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the hold-off time of the
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating
the protection
switching sequence
when the ERPS
coexists with other
protection schemes so
that the fault can be
rectified in the case of
other protection
switching (such as
LAG protection)
before the ERPS
occurs. When a node
on the ring detects one
or more new faults, it
starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset
hold-off time is set to a
value that is not 0.
During the hold-off
time, the fault is not
reported to trigger an
ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the
node checks the link
status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can
be the same as or
different from the fault
that triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.
A-214
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guard Time(ms)
10 to 2000, in step of 10
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the
ring receives the
outdated R-APS
packets, an incorrect
ERPS may occur. The
ERPS guard timer is an
R-APS timer used for
preventing a node on
the ring from receiving
outdated R-APS
packets. When a faulty
node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer
expires.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-215
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(mm:ss)
5 to 12, in step of 1
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers
to the duration from
the time when the
working channel is
restored to the time
when the switching is
released. When the
working channel is
restored, the WTR
timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not
transmitted. In
addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by
the unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit
Interval(s)
1 to 10
Entity Level
0 to 7
A-216
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RB Status
DNF Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-217
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Navigation Path
A-218
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
MSTP
MSTP
STP
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the
port group.
l If the STP or MSTP is
enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically reconfigured. As a
result, the services are
interrupted.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-219
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
4.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Navigation Path
A-220
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
port group.
l This parameter can be
set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
Redaction Level
Mapping List
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
port group.
Bridge Parameters
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
20
A-221
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Network Diameter
2 to 7
l This parameter
specifies the MSTP
network diameter.
l Network Diameter is
related to the link
whose number of
switches is the most
and is indicated by the
number of switches
that are connected to
the link. When you set
Network Diameter
for the switches, the
MSTP automatically
sets Max Age(s),
Hello Time(s), and
Forward Delay(s) to
the more appropriate
values for the
switches.
l If the value of
Network Diameter is
greater, the network is
in a larger scale.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
l This parameter
specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
A-222
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
value of this parameter
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
l The greater the value,
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.
Port Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-223
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
Enabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
l This parameter can be
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
Actual Edge Attribute
A-224
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-Point Attribute
false
auto
l This parameter
specifies the point-topoint attribute of the
port.
true
auto
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-225
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
1 to 255
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
l This parameter needs
to be set according to
the planning
information.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group
MSTI ID
A-226
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
32768
Port Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
200000
l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-227
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
MSTP
l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
STP
A-228
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
32768
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the bridge.
l The most significant
16 bits of the bridge ID
indicate the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
whose MAC address is
the smallest is selected
as the root bridge.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-229
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the root port.
l The most significant
eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher.
Root Port
Hello Time(s)
l This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
value of this parameter
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
A-230
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
l The greater the value,
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Enable Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Port Parameters
Disabled
Port Role
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-231
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Status
Discarding
Discarding
Learning
l Discarding: receives
only BPDU packets
Forwarding
l Learning: only
receives or transmits
BPDU packets
l Forwarding: forwards
user traffic, and
transmits/receives
BPDU packets
Priority
0 to 240, in step of 16
128
Path Cost
1 to 200000000
200000
l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Bridge Priority
32768
A-232
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
0 to 240, in step of 16
Design Port
Disabled
Disabled
l This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
Enabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
l This parameter can be
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
Actual Edge Port
Attribute
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Disabled
A-233
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point to Point
false
auto
l This parameter
specifies the point-topoint attribute of the
port.
true
auto
A-234
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Count of
Transmitting Message
1 to 255
l This parameter
indicates the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
STP
MSTP
l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Hello Time(s)
1 to 10
l This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-235
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
value of this parameter
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
4 to 30
Forward Delay(s)
15
l This parameter
specifies the holding
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
l The greater the value,
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.
Remain Hop
Navigation Path
1.
A-236
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG No.
l This parameter
specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.
l This parameter is valid
only when
Automatically
Assign is not selected.
Automatically Assign
Selected
Selected
Deselected
l This parameter
indicates whether
LAG No. is allocated
automatically.
l When Automatically
Assign is selected,
LAG No. cannot be
set.
LAG Name
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-237
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG Type
Static
Static
Manual
Switch Mode
A-238
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive
Sharing
Non-Sharing
Non-Sharing
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-239
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source MAC
Source MAC
Destination MAC
Source and Destination
MAC
Source IP
Destination IP
Source and Destination IP
MPLS Label
A-240
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
System Priority
0 to 65535
32768
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of a LAG. The smaller
the value of System
Priority, the higher
the priority.
l When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority is
considered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result
based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered
as the result of both
LAGs and is used to
ensure that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.
WTR Time(min)
1 to 30
10
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-241
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter
specifies whether to
enable the switching
triggered by bit errors.
Enabled
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Board
l This parameter
specifies the main
board in a LAG.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Main Port
l This parameter
specifies the main port
in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created,
you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to the
slave port is used for
protection.
l This parameter
specifies the slave
board in a LAG.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A-242
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l This parameter
specifies the salve port
in a LAG.
l The slave ports in a
LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Priority
0 to 65535
32768
l This parameter
indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG
as defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher
the priority.
l When ports are added
into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-243
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Binding Status
Secondary Function
Point Type
Secondary Function
Point
LPT Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
1-600
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000
A-244
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switching Mode
Fault Detection
PW OAM
LPT OAM
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
switching is triggered.
l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period
(100ms)
3-100
User-Side Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-245
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4.
Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
VLAN ID
1-4094
Navigation Path
A-246
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Recovery Times(s)
1-600
Hold-Off Times(ms)
0-10000
1000
Switching Mode
Strict mode
Strict mode
Non-strict mode
l Strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when all its secondary
points detect faults.
l Non-strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when anyone of its
secondary points
detects a fault.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-247
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Fault Detection
PW OAM
LPT OAM
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
switching is triggered.
l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period
(100ms)
3-100
User-Side Port
A-248
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Access Point
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4.
Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-249
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point Type
UNI
PW
QinQ
L2 net
Port
Point ID
A-250
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
VLAN ID
1-4094
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point Type
UNI
PW
QinQ
L2 net
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-251
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Available Points
Selected Points
L2 net ID
1-4294967295
L2 Peer net ID
1-4294967295
A-252
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
1-4094
A-253
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
default
Maintenance
Domain Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A-254
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
Maintenance
Association Name
Relevant Service
CC Test Transmit
Period
1s
1s
10s
1m
10m
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-255
A Parameters Description
3.
Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
Maintenance
Association Name
Board
Port
VLAN
MEP ID
1 to 2048
Direction
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
Active
CC Status
Active
Inactive
Navigation Path
A-256
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
3.
Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point
dialog box is displayed.
4.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
Maintenance
Association Name
Remote
Maintenance Point
ID(e.g:1,3-6)
1 to 2048
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
Board
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-257
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MP ID
1 to 2048
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Selected
Deselected
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Selected
Selected
Maintenance
Domain Name
Maintenance
Association Name
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
A-258
Deselected
Deselected
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
00-00-00-00-00-00
1 to 255
Transmitted
Packet Count
Transmitted
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
0 to 7
Transmitted
Packet Priority
Detection Result
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-259
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Selected
Deselected
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Selected
Selected
Maintenance
Domain Name
Maintenance
Association Name
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Deselected
Deselected
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
00-00-00-00-00-00
A-260
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
Response
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
Hop Count
1 to 64
Test Result
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-261
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable OAM
Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Active
Active
Passive
Link Event
Notification
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
A-262
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote Side
Loopback
Response
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Non-Loopback
Initiate Loopback at
Local
NOTE
Loopback Status is valid only after you choose
OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
Respond Loopback
of Remote
OAM Discovery
Status
FAULT
ACTIVE_SEND_L
OCAL
PASSIVE_WAIT
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE_OK
SEND_ANY
Port Transmit
Status
FWD
DISCARD
FWD
DISCARD
LB
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-263
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frame)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
Error Frame
Period Window
(frame)
1488 to 892800000,
in step of 1
1488
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frame)
1 to 892800000, in
step of 1
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
A-264
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Window
(Entries)
1 to 60, in step of 1
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Threshold
(Entries)
1 to 7500000000, in
step of 1
A-265
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
1 to 8
Default Map
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this
domain.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.
SVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
A-266
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
MPLS EXP
0 to 7
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-267
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
l This parameter
indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB)
service class of the
DiffServ domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
A-268
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the
DiffServ domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-269
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The DSCP refers to
bits 0-5 of the DS field
in the packet and
indicates the service
class and discarding
priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP
0 to 7
A-270
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
MPLS-EXP
NOTE
l The trusted packet
priorities of a UNI port
include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the
E-Line services that are
transparently
transmitted end to end
(UNI-UNI), a UNI port
only trusts DSCP value.
l An NNI port carrying
MPLS/PWE3 services
trusts only packets with
MPLS EXP values.
l The trusted packet
priorities of a QinQ link
NNI port are configured
according to the
planning information.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-271
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
2 to 8
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.
SVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
A-272
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MPLS EXP
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-273
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
A-274
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
CVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-275
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
IP DSCP
0 to 63
l This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
MPLS EXP
A-276
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Available Ports
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-277
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Type
cvlan
cvlan
l This parameter
specifies the type of
the packet.
svlan
ip-dscp
mpls-exp
Navigation Path
A-278
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
4.
A Parameters Description
Click Modify.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
MPLS-EXP
NOTE
l The trusted packet
priorities of a UNI port
include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the
E-Line services that are
transparently
transmitted end to end
(UNI-UNI), a UNI port
only trusts DSCP value.
l An NNI port carrying
MPLS/PWE3 services
trusts only packets with
MPLS EXP values.
l The trusted packet
priorities of a QinQ link
NNI port are configured
according to the
planning information.
Board
Available Port
Selected Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-279
A Parameters Description
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
Policy Name
A-280
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
applicable to the traffic
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-281
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SP
WRR
A-282
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Policy Weight(%)
1 to 100
25
l This parameter
specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
l This parameter can be
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CIR(kbit/s)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-283
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
CBS(byte)
l It is recommended that
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A-284
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
Automatically Assign
Selected
Deselected
Deselected
Policy Name
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-285
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
applicable to the traffic
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
A-286
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SP
WRR
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-287
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Policy Weight(%)
1 to 100
25
l This parameter
specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
l This parameter can be
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CIR(kbit/s)
A-288
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
CBS(byte)
l It is recommended that
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-289
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Traffic Classification ID
1 to 1024
A-290
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ACL Action
Permit
Permit
Deny
Ingress Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Logical Relation
Between Matched Rules
And
And
l This parameter
specifies the logical
relationship between
the traffic
classification
matching rules.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports the setting of
the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-291
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Match Type
DSCP Value
CVlan ID
CVlan priority
SVlan ID
SVlan priority
DSCP Value: 0 to 63
A-292
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
l This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class queue
mapped by the traffic
classification packets.
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-293
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
A-294
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-295
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CBS(byte)
l During a certain
period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is not
more than the CIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and can be
first forwarded in the
case of network
congestion. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
PBS(byte)
l During a certain
period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is more
than the CIR but not
more than the PIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and
marked yellow. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A-296
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Coloration Mode
Color Blindness
Color Blindness
l This parameter
specifies the CAR
operation performed
by the equipment on
the packets. The
packets are dyed
according to the result
of the CAR operation.
The dying rule is
determined by the
comparison between
the rate of the packets
and the preset CAR
value.
l The OptiX RTN 910
supports Color
Blindness only.
Packet Color
Red
l This parameter
specifies the method of
handling the packets.
Yellow
Green
Handling Mode
Discard
Pass
Remark
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-297
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Relabeled CoS
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Egress Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enable
l This parameter
indicates or specifies
whether the traffic
shaping is performed
in the egress function.
Enable
A-298
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-299
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
CBS(byte)
A-300
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Slot No.
Port
CIR (kbit/s)
CBS (byte)
PIR (kbit/s)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-301
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS (byte)
A-302
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
A-303
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Service Type
EPL
EPL
Service Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
A-304
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095
Sink Port
Sink VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-305
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Type
Port Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Level
Service Direction
Direction
Direction
Uplink
Downlink
Available
Resources
Available
Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
A-306
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path
Number of Bound
Paths
Activation Status
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Service Type
EPL
EPL
EVPL(QinQ)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-307
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
Unidirectional
l Add S-VLAN
Strip S-VLAN
l Transparently
transmit CVLAN
l Transparently
transmit SVLAN
l Transparently
transmit SVLAN and CVLAN
l Translate SVLAN
l Translate SVLAN and
transparently
transmit CVLAN
l Strip S-VLAN
Source Port
A-308
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1-4095
Source S-VLAN
1-4095
Sink Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-309
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink C-VLAN(e.g.
1, 3-6)
1-4095
Sink S-VLAN
1-4095
C-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
Priority 0 to Priority
7
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Type
Port Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
A-310
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Level
Service Direction
Direction
Direction
Uplink
Downlink
-
Available
Resources
Available
Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
Bound Path
Activation Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-311
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Service Type
Service Direction
Source Port
Source VLAN
Sink Port
Sink VLAN
Activation Status
Table A-15 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is selected)
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Port Type
Service Direction
Source Port
Source C-VLAN
Source S-VLAN
Sink Port
Sink C-VLAN
Sink S-VLAN
A-312
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
C-VLAN Priority
S-VLAN Priority
Activation Status
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Type
Port Enable
TAG
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
Level
Service Direction
Bound Path
Number of Bound
Paths
Activation Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-313
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
VB name
Bridge Type
802.1q
802.1q
802.1d
802.1ad
Bridge Switch
Mode
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1q
bridge and IEEE
802.1ad bridge,
unsupported by
the IEEE 802.1d
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1d
bridge and IEEE
802.1ad bridge,
unsupported by
the IEEE 802.1q
bridge)
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1q
bridge and the
IEEE 802.1ad
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1d
bridge and the
IEEE 802.1ad
bridge)
Bridge Learning
Mode
Ingress Filter
A-314
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
Mount Port
Port Type
Port Enabled
Disabled
Tag Aware
Enabled
TAG
Access
Tag Aware
Hybrid
Default VLAN ID
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
Active
Service Direction
C-VLAN
S-VLAN
S-VLAN Priority
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-315
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
C-VLAN Priority
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Mounted
Ports
Selected Mounted
Ports
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Level
Service Direction
Direction
Direction
Uplink
Downlink
Available
Resources
Available
Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
A-316
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path
Number of Bound
Paths
Activation Status
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
VB Name
Bridge Type
802.1q
802.1q
802.1d
802.1ad
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-317
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Switch
Mode
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
802.1q bridge
and 802.1ad
bridge,
unsupported by
the 802.1d
bridge)
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
802.1q bridge
and the 802.1ad
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
802.1d bridge
and 802.1ad
bridge,
unsupported by
the 802.1q
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
802.1d bridge
and the 802.1ad
bridge)
Bridge Learning
Mode
Ingress Filter
Displays whether the MAC address selflearning function of the bridge is enabled.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
Mount Port
Port Type
Port Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
TAG
A-318
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Default VLAN ID
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
Activate
Service Direction
C-VLAN
S-VLAN
S-VLAN Priority
C-VLAN Priority
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-319
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Type
Mount Port
Port Type
C-VLAN
1-4095
S-VLAN
1-4095
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port, this parameter
specifies that the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be
added with the S-VLAN ID.
l When Operation Type is set to Add SVLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN,
this parameter and C-VLAN specify the
mapping relationship between the SVLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN
ID carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port, this parameter is invalid.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN,
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID
to be carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
A-320
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN Priority
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
Priority 0 to Priority
7
C-VLAN Priority
AUTO
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Level
Service Direction
Direction
Direction
Uplink
Downlink
-
Available
Resources
Available
Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
Bound Path
Activation Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-321
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
VB ID
VB Name
Bridge Type
Bridge Switch
Mode
Bridge Learning
Mode
Ingress Filter
Active
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
Mount Port
Port Type
A-322
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Enable
Hub/Spoke
Hub
Hub
Spoke
Default VLAN ID
Working Mode
Service Direction
C-VLAN
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-323
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
S-VLAN
S-VLAN Priority
C-VLAN Priority
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
VB Port
Forwarding
Physical Port
A-324
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Activation Status
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
MAC Address
VB Port
Physical Port
Aging Status
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-325
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID(e.g.
1,3-6)
MAC Address
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
Level
Service Direction
Bound Path
Number of Bound
Paths
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
VB Port
A-326
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
Actual MAC
Address Table
Capacity
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB Port
Actual MAC
Address Table
Capacity
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Select an IEEE 802.1q or 802.1ad bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-327
A Parameters Description
NOTE
In the case of IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, the learning mode of the VB must
be IVL.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
VLAN ID(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095
Available
forwarding ports
Selected
forwarding ports
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching
Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.
A-328
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
MAC Address
Aging Time
l 1 to 120 Min
5 Min
l 1 to 120 Hour
l 1 to 120 Day
A-329
A Parameters Description
This section describes the parameters associated with the point-to-point attribute of the spanning
tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling
This section describes the parameters for enabling the IGMP snooping protocol.
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table
Entries
This section describes the parameters for creating static multicast table entries.
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table
Entries
This section describes the parameters for the aging time of multicast table entries.
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs
This topic describes the parameters for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation
This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-point service LPT.
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service
LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-multipoint service LPT.
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
A-330
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Protocol Type
RSTP
RSTP
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
Priority
0-61440
32768
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-331
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
Max Age(s)
6-40
20
1-10
Hello Time(s)
4-30
Forward Delay(s)
15
1-10
TxHoldCout(per
second)
Navigation Path
A-332
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Priority
0-240
128
1-200000000
Status
Admin Edge
Attribute
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Protocol Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-333
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto Edge
Detection
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB
Priority
MAC Address
Designed Root
Bridge Priority
Designed Root
Bridge MAC
Address
A-334
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Root Port
Max Age(s)
Hello Time(s)
Forward Delay(s)
HoldCout
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port ID
Port Status
Designated Port D
Designated Root
Bridge Priority
Designated Root
Bridge MAC
Address
Designated Path
Cost
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-335
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Designated Bridge
Priority
Designated Bridge
MAC Address
Topology
Detection
Running Time(s)
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
A-336
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-point
Attribute
Adaptive
connection
Adaptive connection
Link connection
Shared media
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the
Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
VB
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-337
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Enable
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the
Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VB ID
A-338
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
MAC Address
Multicast Port
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the
Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-339
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Multicast Aging
Time(Min)
1-120
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Attribute Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG No
1-12
LAG Name
A-340
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG Type
Static
Static
Manual
Sharing
Sharing
Non-Sharing
Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode
Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-341
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Port
Available Slave
Ports
Selected Slave
Ports
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Priority
0-65535
32768
A-342
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
System Priority
0-65535
32768
System MAC
Address
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.
2.
Click Query.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
VCTRUNK Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-343
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Yes
LPT
No
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
GFP-CSF
No
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
PORT-Type Port
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000
VCTRUNK Port
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000
Navigation Path
1.
A-344
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
2.
Click PtoMP LPT. Then, the LPT Management dialog box appears.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
GFP-CSF
Port Hold-Off
Time(ms)
0-10000
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Bearer Mode
GFP(HUAWEI)
GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
GFP-CSF
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-345
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mirror Listener
Port
Uplink Listener
Port
Downlink Listener
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
3.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain
Name
Maintenance Domain
Level
Consumer High(7)
Operator Low(0)
Consumer Middle(6)
Consumer Low(5)
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-347
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
3.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance Domain
Name
Maintenance
Association Name
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
NULL
A-348
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Association Name
NULL
Node
VLAN ID
MP ID
Standard MP:
00-00-0000 to FFFF-1FFF
00-00-0000
MEP
Ingress
Common MP:
00-00-0000 to FFFF-FF00
Type
MEP
MIP
Direction
Ingress
Egress
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-349
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
Consumer High(7)
Provider High(4)
Consumer Middle
(6)
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for a common MP
(NULL).
Consumer Low(5)
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)
CC Status
Active
Inactive
5000
Inactive
LB Timeout(ms)
3000 to 60000, in
step of 100
3000 to 60000, in
step of 100
5000
CCM Sending
Period(ms)
Standard MP:
Standard MP
1000
1000
10000
Common MP:
6000
5000
600000
Common MP:
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
A-350
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
Select the node that requires an LB test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LB.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LB Source MP ID
LB Sink MP ID
Test Result
Selected
Not selected
Not selected
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
for a standard MP.
LB Sink MP MAC
Address
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2.
Select the node that requires an LT test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LT.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-351
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LT Source MP ID
LT Sink MP ID
Responding MP ID
Responding MP Type
Hop Count
Test Result
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PORT
A-352
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Active
Active
Passive
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Loopback Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-353
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PORT
For example:
PORT1
Error Frame
Monitor(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(Entries)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
Error Frame
period Window
(frame)
14880 to 8928000,
in step of 1
148800
Error Frame
period Threshold
(frame)
1 to 892800000, in
step of 1
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
60
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
1 to 900, in step of 1
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Unidirectional
Operation
Max.OAM Packet
Length (byte)
A-355
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
A-356
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Flow Type
Port Flow
Port Flow
Port+VLAN Flow
Port+SVLAN Flow
Port+CVLAN
+SVLAN Flow
Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-357
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
PORT1-PORT9,
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
PORT1
1-4095
VLAN ID
C-VLAN
1-4095
1-4095
S-VLAN
Priority
Navigation Path
A-358
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CAR ID
1-512
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Committed
information Rate
(kbit/s)
0-100032
Step: 64
0-1024
Peak information
Rate(kbit/s)
0-100032
Step: 64
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-359
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Burst
Size(kbyte)
0-1024
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS ID
1-64
A-360
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS Type
simple
simple
VLAN Priority
IPTOS
DSCP
CoS Priority
0-7
A-361
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required Ethernet switching board, and then choose
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Flow Type
VB ID
Port
C-VLAN
S-VLAN
Priority
Bound CAR
None
Bound CoS
None
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
A-362
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Queue
Status
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
CIR(kbit/s)
0-100032
Step: 64
PIR(kbit/s)
0-100032
Step: 64
DMBS(kbyte)
A-363
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Name
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
Auto-Negotiation
A-364
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Frame
Length
1518-2000
1522
Port Physical
Parameters
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Loopback
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Loopback
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-365
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NonAutonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode
Disabled
Disabled
Enable Symmetric
Flow Control Mode
Send Only
Receive Only
Disabled
Disabled
Enable
Dissymmetric Flow
Control
Enable Symmetric
Control
Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control
A-366
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Default VLAN ID
1-4095
VLAN Priority
0-7
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-367
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Attributes
UNI
UNI
C-Aware
S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Awareor SAware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Disabled
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
10%-100%
30%
Traffic Threshold
(Mbit/s)
0-100 (PORT1PORT8)
100 (PORT1PORT8)
0-1000 (PORT9)
1000 (PORT9)
A-368
Enabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Traffic
Threshold Time
Window(Min)
0-30
Loop Detection
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Ingress port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Untagged frame
A-369
A Parameters Description
Direction
Egress port
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
A-370
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Default VLAN ID
1-4095
VLAN Priority
0-7
Entry Detection
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Mapping Protocol
GFP
GFP
Scramble
Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
Unscrambled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
A-371
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Check Field
Length
FCS32
FCS32
No
Big endian
Big endian
Little endian
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Attributes
UNI
UNI
C-Aware
S-Aware
l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or SAware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or SAware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
A-372
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling LCAS
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Huawei Mode
Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
An integer ranging
from 0, 2000 to
10000, in the
increments of 100
2000
WTR(s)
0-720
300
TSD
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-373
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Minimum Number
of Members in the
Transmit Direction
2-256
16
Minimum Number
of Members in the
Receive Direction
2-256
16
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK Port
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
VCTRUNK1
Level
Service Direction
Direction
Direction
Uplink
Downlink
Available
Resources
Available
Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63
A-374
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bound Path
Number of Bound
Paths
Activation Status
Ingress port
Egress port
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
Untagged frame
Tagged frame
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-375
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Advance Attribute > QinQ Type Area Settings from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
81 00
8100
88 A8
91 00
0600 to FFFF
Navigation Path
A-376
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
Sampling Period
5 to 150
Display
Accumulated
Value
Selected
Deselected
Deselected
Display Mode
List
List
Color
Legend
Description
Event
Navigation Path
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-377
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
Ended from/to
History Table
Type
30-Second
30-Second
List
30-Minute
Custom Period 1
Custom Period 2
Display Mode
Graphics
List
Legend
Description
Event
Statistical Item
Statistical Value
Time Flag
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
A-378
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
300 to 43200
(Custom Period 1)
900(Custom Period
1)
300 to 86400
(Custom Period 2)
86400(Custom
Period 2)
1 to 50
16
Disabled
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
Period Length(s)
History Register
Count
6(Custom Period 2)
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
Object Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled
NOTE
In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-379
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
Event Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Event
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
A-380
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Threshold Detect
Report All
Report All
Do Not Detect
Upper Threshold
Lower Threshold
Threshold Unit
For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet
Features on the Packet Plane.
A-381
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
A-382
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSR ID
0.0.0.0
l Specifies or displays
the LSR ID of an NE.
On a PSN, each NE is
assigned a unique LSR
ID.
l This parameter must
be set in IPv4 address
format.
0-1015808
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-383
A Parameters Description
3.
Click Query.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
Name
Enable State
Enabled
Enabled
l Specifies or displays
whether a tunnel is
enabled.
Disabled
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910
supports only the value
Enabled.
Node Type
Direction
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
No Limit
l Specifies or displays
the committed
information rate (CIR)
of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is
recommended that you
set this parameter to No
Limit. If you need to
enable the CES CAC
function or limit the
PW bandwidth, set this
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s)
PIR(byte)
PBS(byte)
Bandwidth Remaining
(kbit/s)
A-384
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
In Port
Forward In Label
Out Port
Reverse In Label
Source Node
Sink Node
Tunnel Type
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-385
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
0-7
l Specifies or displays
the value of the EXP
field in the packets
transmitted through
MPLS tunnels.
None
l For unidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
is available only if
Node Type is Ingress.
l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
l If this parameter is set
to a value from 0 to 7,
the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
l If this parameter takes
its default value None,
the EXP field varies
based on the DiffServ
mappings.
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
l Displays or specifies
the LSP mode.
l Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels
from packets, an egress
node does not update
the scheduling priority
for the packets.
l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
is available only if
Node Type is Egress.
l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 910, this
parameter can be set to
Pipe only.
MTU(byte)
A-386
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
VLAN ID
l Specifies or displays
the VLAN ID that
Ethernet packets carry
when transmitted over
MPLS tunnels.
l If packets need to
traverse a Layer 2
network, set the VLAN
ID for the tunnel
carried by the NNI port
according to the
VLAN planning
requirements on the
Layer 2 network.
l Set this parameter to
the same value for both
ends of a tunnel.
Deployment
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
3.
Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
4.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-387
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
1-65535
Tunnel Name
Node Type
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
Transit
Direction
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
No Limit
l Specifies the
committed information
rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is
recommended that you
set this parameter to No
Limit. If you need to
enable the CES CAC
function or limit the
PW bandwidth, set this
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s)
PIR(Byte)
PBS(Byte)
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
In Port
A-388
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
In Labela
16-1048575
Out Board/Logic
Interface Type
Out Port
Out Labela
16-1048575
Source Node
Sink Node
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-389
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Type
E-LSP
E-LSP
L-LSP
0-7
None
None
A-390
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
MTU
NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each
other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
3.
Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
1 to 65535
Tunnel Name
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Node Type
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
Transit
Direction
CIR(kbit/s)
No Limit
No Limit
l Specifies the
committed information
rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
1024-1024000
l Generally, it is
recommended that you
set this parameter to No
Limit. If you need to
enable the CES CAC
function or limit the
PW bandwidth, set this
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s)
PIR(Byte)
PBS(Byte)
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
In Port
Forward In Labela
16 to 1048575
A-392
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
16 to 1048575
Out Board/Logic
Interface Type
Out Port
16 to 1048575
Reverse In Labela
16 to 1048575
l Indicates or specifies
the IP address of the
next hop in a forward
tunnel.
l This parameter can be
set for only ingress and
transit nodes.
l Indicates or specifies
the IP address of the
next hop in a reverse
tunnel.
l This parameter can be
set for only egress and
transit nodes.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-393
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Node
Sink Node
Tunnel Type
E-LSP
E-LSP
L-LSP
A-394
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
0 to 7
None
None
LSP Mode
Pipe
MTU
NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each
other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-395
A Parameters Description
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel ID
Tunnel Name
Node Type
Tunnel Direction
OAM Status
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies or displays
whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
Disabled
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If MPLS APS
protection needs to be
configured or a CC test
needs to be performed
for the tunnel, OAM
Status needs to be set
to Enabled.
A-396
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies or displays
the MPLS OAM
detection mode.
Manual
l Manual: During a CC
test, MPLS OAM
packets are sent at the
interval specified by
the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, MPLS OAM
packets are sent at the
interval for receiving
MPLS OAM packets.
l For a unidirectional
tunnel, this parameter
can be set for its egress
node only.
l For a bidirectional
tunnel, if Detection
Mode is set to
Manual, you need to
set the MPLS OAM
detection packets to be
received and
transmitted.
l Generally, the value
Auto-Sensing is
recommended.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-397
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
FFD
A-398
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
3.3
50
l Displays or specifies
the OAM detection
period.
10
20
l This parameter is
available only when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD. It takes
its fixed value of 1000
ms when Detection
Packet Type is CV.
50
100
200
500
CV/FFD Status
LSP Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-399
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Threshold
0-100
l Specifies or displays
the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
loss ratio is higher than
the parameter value,
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
l For a unidirectional
tunnel, this parameter
can be set for its egress
node only.
l When this parameter is
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
SF Threshold
0-100
l Specifies or displays
the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
loss ratio is higher than
the parameter value,
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
l For a unidirectional
tunnel, this parameter
can be set for its egress
node only.
l When this parameter is
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
Source Node
Sink Node
A-400
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable FDI
Selected
Selected
l Specifies or displays
whether Enable FDI is
selected.
Not selected
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-401
A Parameters Description
3.
Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Ping Test from the drop-down list.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Count
1 to 4294967295
EXP Value
0 to 7
TTL
1 to 255
255
Transmit Interval
(10ms)
1 to 1000
100
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
A-402
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
No Response
Application Control
Channel
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
performance event is
reported without
sending response
packets.
l The value Application
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
l The value IPv4 UDP
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
l Set this parameter
based on the situation
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-403
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Mode cannot be set to
Application Control
Channel.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2.
3.
Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP Value
0 to 7
TTL
1 to 255
255
Packet Length
84 to 1400
84
A-404
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-405
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
No Response
Application Control
Channel
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
performance event is
reported without
sending response
packets.
l The value Application
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
l The value IPv4 UDP
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
l Set this parameter
based on the situation
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
A-406
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Parameter
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Mode cannot be set to
Application Control
Channel.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Enable State
PW Signaling
Type
PW Type
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses only static PWs.
Direction
PW Ingress
Label/Source
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-407
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW
Encapsulation
Type
PW Egress
Label/Sink
Port
Opposite LSR
ID
Local
Working
Status
Remote
Working
Status
Compositive
Working
Status
Tunnel Type
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 supports only MPLS
encapsulation.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 supports only MPLS tunnels.
Tunnel
Deployment
Status
Tunnel
Automatic
Selection
Policy
QoS Parameters
Table A-70 CES services
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
A-408
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
CIR(kbit/s)
EXP
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Direction
Bandwidth Limit
CIR(kbit/s)
CBS(byte)
PIR(kbit/s)
PBS(byte)
EXP
LSP Mode
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910
supports only Pipe.
Policy
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-409
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Direction
Bandwidth Limit
CIR(kbit/s)
CBS(byte)
PIR(kbit/s)
PBS(byte)
EXP
Policy
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
RTP Head
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
A-410
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Threshold of Entering R
bit Inserting Status
Threshold of Exiting R
bit Inserting Status
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Control Word
VCCV Verification
Mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-411
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Request VLAN
When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
parameter displays the
VLAN ID to be added to
packets that are sent from
the opposite end and do
not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID
When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
parameter displays the
TPID.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Control Word
VCCV Verification
Mode
Navigation Path
A-412
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ID
Name
MTU(byte)
Service Type
ETH Service
ETH Service
CES Service
ATM Service
Connection
Type
Port Transparent
Port Transparent
PVP
PVC
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-413
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
Direction
PW Encapsulation Type
Displays the
encapsulation type of the
PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
16 to 1048575
Manually
Manually
A-414
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Tunnel
Opposite LSR ID
Egress Tunnel
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
QoS Parameters
CES Services
Ethernet services
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-415
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy
CIR(Kbit/s)
CBS(byte)
PIR(Kbit/s)
PBS(byte)
EXP
LSP Mode
Pipe
Pipe
A-416
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
ATM services
Table A-76 ATM services
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Policy
CIR (Kbit/s)
CBS (kbyte)
PIR (kbit/s)
PBS (kbyte)
EXP
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-417
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Header
Disable
Disable
Enable
375 to 16000
8000
125 to 5000
1000
A-418
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Null
Null
1 to 31
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-419
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Huawei Mode
Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
No Use
No Use
None
Alert Label
Alert Label
Ping
Ping
None
Request VLAN
TPID
A-420
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
ATM services
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
Must Use
Must Use
l Specifies whether to
use the control word.
In the MPLS packet
switching network, the
control word is used to
transmit packet
information.
No Use
CW
CW
None
Alert Label
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
Ping
None
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-421
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
1 to 31
10
l Specifies the
maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
packet. If the value
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.
100 to 50000
1000
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
A-422
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
OAM Status
Enabled
Disabled
l Specifies or displays
whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
Disabled
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If PW APS protection
needs to be configured
or a CC test needs to be
performed for the
tunnel, OAM Status
needs to be set to
Enabled.
Associate AC State
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-423
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
l Specifies or displays
the detection mode for
PW OAM packets.
Manual
l Manual: During a CC
test, PW OAM packets
are sent at the interval
specified by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, PW OAM
packets are sent at the
interval for receiving
PW OAM packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the type of
PW OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value AutoSensing is
recommended.
A-424
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
FFD
3.3
50
10
20
l Displays or specifies
the OAM detection
period.
l If Detection Packet
Type is FFD, this
parameter can be set; if
Detection Packet
Type is CV, the value
is always 1000.
50
100
200
500
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-425
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Threshold (%)
0-100
l Specifies or displays
the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
loss ratio is higher than
the parameter value,
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
l When this parameter is
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
SF Threshold (%)
0-100
l Specifies or displays
the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
loss ratio is higher than
the parameter value,
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
l When this parameter is
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
LSR ID to Be Received
l Specifies or displays
the LSR ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
PW ID to be Received
l Specifies or displays
the PW ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
Local Disable PW
Duration(ms)
A-426
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Local PW Defect
Location
Remote Disable PW
Duration(ms)
Remote PW Defect
Location
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Select the required PW and click OAM Operation > Ping Test.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Count
1 to 4294967295
EXP Value
0 to 7
TTL
1 to 255
255
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-427
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Interval
(10ms)
1 to 1000
100
Packet Length
64 to 1400
64
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
A-428
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
No Response
Application Control
Channel
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
performance event is
reported without
sending response
packets.
l The value Application
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
l The value IPv4 UDP
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
l Set this parameter
based on the situation
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the remote
PE does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-429
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
Alert Label
NOTE
ETH-PWE3 services do not
support Control Word.
Peer PW ID
Peer IP
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Select the required PW, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP Value
0 to 7
TTL
1 to 255
255
Packet Length
84 to 1400
84
A-430
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000
300
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-431
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Response Mode
No Response
Application Control
Channel
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
performance event is
reported without
sending response
packets.
l The value Application
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
l The value IPv4 UDP
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
l Set this parameter
based on the situation
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the remote
PE does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
A-432
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
Protection Type
Switching Mode
Dual-Ended
l Displays or specifies
the switching mode of
a protection group.
Single-Ended
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-433
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BDI Status
Disabled
l Specifies or displays
whether the protection
switching is triggered
upon receiving BDI
packets.
Enabled
l This parameter is
available only when
Switching Mode is set
to Single-End.
l If BDI Status is set to
Enabled, the egress
node notifies the
ingress node of any
detected faults by
sending BDI packets;
upon receiving BDI
packets, the ingress
node triggers
protection switching.
Transmit and receive
Status of Protocol Packet
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
l Specifies or displays
whether to switch
services to the original
working tunnel after
the fault is rectified.
Revertive
A-434
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(min)
1-12
Hold-Time(100ms)
0-100
Protocol Status
Switching Status
Deployment Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-435
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Unit
Active Tunnel
Tunnel Status
Tunnel Type
Tunnel Direction
Ingress Tunnel
Egress Tunnel
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS
Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
1:1
1:1
A-436
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switching Mode
Single-End
Dual-End
Dual-End
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
MPLS Tunnel
MPLS Tunnel
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-437
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Ingress
Tunnel ID
A-438
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Ingress
Tunnel Name
Protection Egress
Tunnel ID
l Specifies the
protection tunnel of the
protection group in the
egress direction.
l For a bidirectional
tunnel, if the parameter
Protection Ingress
Tunnel ID is set, a
value is automatically
assigned to the
parameter Protection
Egress Tunnel ID.
Protection Egress
Tunnel Name
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive
l This parameter
specifies whether to
switch services back to
the original working
tunnel after it recovers.
Revertive
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-439
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(min)
1 to 12
Hold-Time(100ms)
0 to 100
Protocol Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
A-440
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
4.
Click New.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
4.
Click New.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
4.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
PW Type
Direction
PW Encapsulation Type
Displays the
encapsulation type of the
PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-441
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
16 to 1048575
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Tunnel
A tunnel needs to be
selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Opposite LSR ID
Egress Tunnel
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
QoS Parameters
Table A-77 CES services
A-442
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enabled
CIR(kbit/s)
CBS(byte)
PIR(kbit/s)
PBS(byte)
EXP
LSP Mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-443
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enabled
CBS(byte)
PIR(kbit/s)
PBS(byte)
EXP
Policy
A-444
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Head
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
Threshold of Entering R
bit Inserting Status
Threshold of Exiting R
bit Inserting Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-445
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
VCCV Verification
Mode
Request VLAN
When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
parameter displays the
VLAN ID to be added to
packets that are sent from
the opposite end and do
not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
VCCV Verification
Mode
A-446
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
Protection Group ID
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Switching Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter
specifies whether to
switch services back to
the original working
PW after it recovers.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Nonrevertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-447
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12
0 to 100
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
Detection mode
OAM Parameters
A-448
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval specified
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value AutoSensing is
recommended.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-449
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
FFD
3.3
50
10
20
50
100
200
500
PW ID to be Received
Specifies the PW ID to be
received.
A-450
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
4.
Click New.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
4.
Click New.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
4.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
PW Type
Direction
PW Encapsulation Type
Displays the
encapsulation type of the
PW.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-451
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
16 to 1048575
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Tunnel
A tunnel needs to be
selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Opposite LSR ID
Egress Tunnel
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
QoS Parameters
Table A-83 CES services
A-452
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enabled
CIR(kbit/s)
CBS(byte)
PIR(kbit/s)
PBS(byte)
EXP
LSP Mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-453
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enabled
CBS(byte)
PIR(kbit/s)
PBS(byte)
EXP
Policy
A-454
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Head
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
Threshold of Entering R
bit Inserting Status
Threshold of Exiting R
bit Inserting Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-455
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
VCCV Verification
Mode
Request VLAN
When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
parameter displays the
VLAN ID to be added to
packets that are sent from
the opposite end and do
not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
VCCV Verification
Mode
A-456
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode
Protection Group ID
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES
Service Management from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
Service name
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-457
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
Source Board
A-458
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Priority List
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-459
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel
Sink Board
Deployment Status
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Working Status
Enable State
PW Signaling Type
A-460
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
PW Encapsulation Type
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
Opposite LSR ID
Compositive Working
Status
Tunnel type
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-461
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel
Deployment Status
Tunnel Automatic
Selection Policy
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Direction
CIR(kbit/s)
EXP
QoS Parameters
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
RTP Header
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
375 to 16000
l Displays or specifies
the jitter buffer time.
l The jitter buffer time
guarantees the realtime performance of
the CES service.
NOTE
Set Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us) to a
value greater than the value
of Packet Loading Time
(us) at the opposite end and
the local end.
A-462
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCCV Verification
Mode
Enabled
Threshold of Entering R
Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Disabled
A-463
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Threshold of Exiting R
Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Protection Mode
A-464
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling Status
Enabled
l Displays or specifies
the enabling status of
the PW protection
group.
Disabled
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
l Specifies whether to
switch services to the
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Nonrevertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-465
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12
l Displays or specifies
the WTR time of the
protection group.
l When the preset WTR
time expires after the
original working PW
recovers, services are
switched to the
original working PW.
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
0 to 100
l Displays or specifies
the hold-off time of the
protection group.
l If this parameter is set
to a value other than 0,
the protection group
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but waits
until the hold-off time
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist. If any
faults persist, the
switching is triggered;
otherwise, no
switching is triggered.
Deployment Status
Switchover Status
Protocol Status
A-466
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
DNI PW ID
PW Type
Deployment Status
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID(e.g.1,3-6)
1 to 4294967295
Service name
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-467
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
E1
E1
Mode
UNI-NNI
UNI-NNI
UNI-UNI
1-31
1-31
A-468
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Priority List
CS7
EF
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-469
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Type
CESoPSN
CESoPSN
SAToP
l CESoPSN: Indicates
structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation
service over packet
switched network.
Timeslot compression
can be set. SAToP:
Indicates structureagnostic TDM over
packet. Timeslot
compression cannot be
set.
Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection
PW APS
Slave Protection Pair
l Specifies the
protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
available only when
Mode is UNI-NNI.
l If this parameter is set
to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
need to be configured.
l When this parameter is
set to
Slave Protection Pair
, you need to bind the
slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
switching of the master
PW APS protection
group triggers the
switching of the slave
PW APS protection
group simultaneously.
Sink Board
A-470
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
1-31
1-31
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of
working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW
as an example.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
PW Type
Direction
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-471
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW Encapsulation Type
Displays the
encapsulation type of the
PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
16 to 1048575
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Tunnel
A tunnel needs to be
selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Opposite LSR ID
Egress Tunnel
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
EXP
QoS Parameters
A-472
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RTP Header
Disable
Disable
375 to 16000
8000
125 to 5000
1000
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-473
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Null
Null
A-474
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
None
None
CW
Alert Label
VCCV Verification
Mode
None
None
Ping
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
A-475
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Threshold of Entering R
Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
100
l The corresponding
alarm will be reported
if the number of
consecutive lost
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
Threshold of Exiting R
Bit Inserting Status
1-65535
l The corresponding
alarm will be cleared if
the number of
consecutive received
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
Standard Mode
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
PW APS.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
Protection Group ID
A-476
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Switching Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter
specifies whether to
switch services back to
the original working
PW after it recovers.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Nonrevertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-477
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12
0 to 100
Detection mode
OAM Parameters
NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of
PWs is set to PW APS.
l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management >
PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
A-478
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval specified
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value AutoSensing is
recommended.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-479
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
FFD
3.3
50
10
20
50
100
200
500
PW ID to be Received
Specifies the PW ID to be
received.
A-480
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
Slave Protection Pair.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode
Protection Group ID
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
A-481
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
A-482
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
1 to 16
A-483
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Minimum Number of
Active Receiving Links
1 to 16
Number of Active
Receiving Links must
assume the same value
on the two ends of an
IMA link.
l The default value is
recommended.
1.0
1.1
1.1
A-484
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
32
128
64
128
256
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-485
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l Specifies the
symmetrical mode of
the IMA group.
l If the symmetrical
mode and symmetrical
operation is adopted,
the bandwidth of the
IMA group is always
consistent in the
transmit direction and
in the receive
direction, even when
some member links
fail. In symmetrical
mode:
Bandwidth of the
IMA group = min
{bandwidth in the
transmit direction,
bandwidth in the
receive direction}
The unidirectional
failure of one
member link is
equivalent to the
bidirectional
failure of one
member link.
A-486
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Delay
Between Links (ms)
1 to 120
25
l Specifies the
maximum differential
delay that is allowed
between the member
links.
l If the differential delay
between a member link
and the other member
links exceeds the
value, this link will be
deactivated and
deleted from the IMA
group.
l If this parameter is set
to a value higher than
the normal value
range, the delay of
IMA services will be
prolonged and even
packet loss will occur;
if this parameter is set
to a value lower than
the normal value
range, a working link
will be deleted by
mistake.
l The Maximum Delay
Between Links (ms)
must assume the same
value on the two ends
of an IMA link.
l The default value is
recommended.
Clock Mode
CTC Mode
CTC Mode
ITC Mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-487
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click Configuration.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Boards
Configuration Ports
Level
E1
E1
Fractional E1
Direction
Optical Interface
Available Resources
A-488
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Timeslots
VCTRUNK
Level
Direction
Bound Paths
Display in Combination
Selected
Selected
Specifies whether to
display bound paths in
combination.
Not selected
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-489
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Number of Transmit
Links
Number of Receive
Links
Number of Activated
Transmit Links
Number of Activated
Receive Links
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
E1 Link
Displays E1 links.
Near-End Receiving
Status
Near-End Transmitting
Status
Far-End Receiving
Status
Far-End Transmitting
Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Name
Port Type
UNI
UNI
NNI
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-491
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Disabled
Enabled
Specifies whether to
enable payload
scrambling of ATM cells.
Enabled
Max. VPI
Min. VCI
Max. VCI
VCC-Supported VPI
Count
Loopback
No Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Inloop
A-492
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from
the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
UBR
BE
AF11
AF12
AF13
AF21
AF22
AF23
AF31
AF32
AF33
AF41
AF42
AF43
EF
CS6
CS7
UBR: BE
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
CBR: EF
RT-VBR: AF31
NRT-VBR: AF21
UBR+: AF11
PORT-TRANS: BE
A-493
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
PORT-TRANS
Navigation Path
A-494
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration
from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
2 to 8
UBR
BE
AF11
AF12
AF13
AF21
AF22
AF23
AF31
AF32
AF33
AF41
AF42
AF43
EF
CS6
CS7
UBR: BE
CBR: EF
RT-VBR: AF31
NRT-VBR: AF21
UBR+: AF11
PORT-TRANS: BE
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
PORT-TRANS
NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-495
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
Policy Name
A-496
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
UBR
UBR
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-497
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
described as bursty. In
addition, the rt-VBR
service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-realtime applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type
Clp01Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp01Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp0Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp0Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
2 to 200000
7 to 13300000
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
A-498
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
UPC/NPC
Enabled
Disabled
Displays or specifies
UPC/NPC.
Disabled
l UPC is user-side
parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.
Table A-89 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters
ATM
Service
Type
Traffic
Parameter 1
Traffic
Parameter 2
Traffic
Parameter 3
Traffic
Parameter 4
UBR
NoTrafficDescriptor
NoClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
ClpTransparentNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
ClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
NoClpScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
ClpNoTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
ClpTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
ClpTransparentScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
atmnotrafficdescriptormcr
Clp01Mcr
atmnoclpmcr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
CBR
nrtVBR
rtVBR
UBR+
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-499
A Parameters Description
ATM
Service
Type
Traffic
Parameter 1
Traffic
Parameter 2
Traffic
Parameter 3
Traffic
Parameter 4
atmnoclpmcrcdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
CDVT
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
Displays the ID
configured for the ATM
service.
Service Name
Link ID
Direction
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
A-500
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy Name
Synchronous signal
Synchronous signal
Signaling
Voice
Data
NOTE
You can select one of the
five ATM service policy
names from the drop-down
list or enter the policy name.
Video
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-501
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
UBR
UBR
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
A-502
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Parameter
Value Range
A Parameters Description
Default Value
Description
addition, the rt-VBR
service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rtVBR service, the nrtVBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-realtime applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type
Clp01Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp01Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp0Pcr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
Clp0Scr(cell/s)
90 to 74539
2 to 200000
7 to 13300000
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-503
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
UPC/NPC
Enabled
Disabled
l UPC is user-side
parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
Disabled
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.
Table A-90 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters
ATM
Service
Type
Traffic
Parameter 1
Traffic
Parameter 2
Traffic
Parameter 3
Traffic
Parameter 4
UBR
NoTrafficDescriptor
NoClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
ClpTransparentNoScr
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
ClpTaggingNoScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Pcr
NoClpNoScr
Clp01Pcr
NoClpNoScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
CDVT
NoClpScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
ClpNoTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
ClpTaggingScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
ClpTransparentScr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp0Scr
MBS
CDVT
atmnotrafficdescriptormcr
Clp01Mcr
atmnoclpmcr
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
atmnoclpmcrcdvt
Clp01Pcr
Clp01Mcr
CDVT
CBR
nrtVBR
rtVBR
UBR+
A-504
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
Service Management from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
Service Name
Service Type
Deployment Status
Connection Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection ID
Connection Name
Source Port
PW ID
Sink Port
Source VPI
Source VCI
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-505
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VPI
Sink VCI
Uplink Policy
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Port Type
Max. VPI
Max. VCI
VCC-Supported VPI
Count
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCTRUNK
Level
Direction
Bound Paths
A-506
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Parameters of PWs
Tab
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
General
Attributes
PW ID
Work Status
Enable State
Displays whether a PW
is enabled.
PW Signaling Type
Displays the PW
signaling type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses
static PWs only.
PW Type
l Displays the
configured PW type.
l This parameter
corresponds to the
connection type.
The encapsulation
type can be 1:1 or N:
1 if the connection
type is PVP or PVC.
Direction
PW Encapsulation
Type
Displays the
encapsulation type of
the packets on the PW.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses
MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label /
Source Port
PW Egress Label /
Sink Port
Opposite LSR ID
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-507
A Parameters Description
Tab
QoS
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Local Working
Status
Remote Working
Status
Compositive
Working Status
Displays the
comprehensive
working status of the
PW.
Deployment Status
Displays the
deployment status.
PW ID
Direction
Bandwidth Limit
Displays or specifies
whether the bandwidth
limit is enabled.
l This function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an
MPLS tunnel. (One
ATM PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l
CIR (Kbit/s)
Displays or specifies
the committed
information rate.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as PIR.
CBS (kbyte)
A-508
Displays or specifies
the excess burst size of
the PW.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Tab
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR (kbit/s)
Displays or specifies
the peak information
rate.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as CIR.
Advanced
Attributes
PBS (kbyte)
Displays or specifies
the maximum excess
burst size of the PW.
EXP
Policy
Control Word
Must Use
Displays or specifies
whether to use the
control word. In the
MPLS packet switching
network, the control
word is used to transmit
packet information.
l Displays or
specifies the mode
of PW connectivity
check.
No Use
Control Channel
Type
CW
None
Alert Label
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-509
A Parameters Description
Tab
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
l Displays or
specifies the VCCV
verification mode.
The VCCV
verification is used
for PW connectivity
check.
None
l If the VCCV-Ping
test is required, set
this parameter to
Ping.
Max. Concatenated
Cell Count
1 to 31
l Displays or
specifies the
maximum number
of concatenated
cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
packet. If the value
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a
maximum of 2 to 31
ATM cells are
encapsulated into
one packet.
Packet Loading
Time (us)
100 to 50000
l Displays or
specifies the packet
loading time. Once
the packet loading
time expires, the
packet is sent out
even if the
concatenated cells
are less than the
maximum.
l If Max.
Concatenated Cell
Count assumes the
value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is,
the packet will be
sent out once the cell
is loaded.
A-510
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
CoS Mapping
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Protection Mode
Enabling Status
Enabled
l Displays or specifies
the enabling status of
the PW protection
group.
Disabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-511
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Mode
Restoration Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
l Specifies whether to
switch services to the
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Nonrevertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12
l Displays or specifies
the WTR time of the
protection group.
l When the preset WTR
time expires after the
original working PW
recovers, services are
switched to the
original working PW.
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
A-512
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
0 to 100
l Displays or specifies
the hold-off time of the
protection group.
l If this parameter is set
to a value other than 0,
the protection group
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but waits
until the hold-off time
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist. If any
faults persist, the
switching is triggered;
otherwise, no
switching is triggered.
Deployment Status
Switchover Status
Protocol Status
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-513
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967295
Service Name
Service Type
UNIs-NNI
UNIs-NNI
UNI-UNI
A-514
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Type
PVC
UNIs-NNI:PVC
PVP
UNI-UNI:PVC
Protection Type
No Protection
No Protection
PW APS
l Specifies the
protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
available only when
Service Type is UNIsNNI.
l Set this parameter
according to the
planning information.
Connection Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Connection Name
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-515
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Board
Source Port
Source VPI(eg.35,36-39)
UNI: 0 to 255
NNI: 0 to 4095
Source VCI(eg.35,36-39)
32 to 65535
PW ID
1 to 4294967295
Sink Board
Sink Port
Sink VPI(eg.35,36-39)
UNI: 0 to 255
NNI: 0 to 4095
Sink VCI(eg.35,36-39)
32 to 65535
Uplink Policy
Parameters of PWs
NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS, all the parameters of working and protection PWs
need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.
A-516
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
Working Status
Enable Status
PW Signaling Type
Static
Static
PW Type
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
PW Encapsulation Type
MPLS
MPLS
Displays the
encapsulation type of the
packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label /
Source Port
16 to 1048575
16 to 1048575
Manually
Manually
Tunnel Type
MPLS
MPLS
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-517
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tunnel
A tunnel needs to be
selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Opposite LSR ID
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
QoS Parameters
Table A-91 ATM services
CIR (Kbit/s)
CBS (kbyte)
A-518
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR (kbit/s)
PBS (kbyte)
EXP
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control Word
Must Use
Must Use
l Specifies whether to
use the control word.
In the MPLS packet
switching network, the
control word is used to
transmit packet
information.
No Use
CW
CW
None
Alert Label
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-519
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
Ping
None
1 to 31
10
l Specifies the
maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
packet. If the value
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.
100 to 50000
1000
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
PW APS.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
A-520
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group ID
Enabling Status
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Switching Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive
l This parameter
specifies whether to
switch services back to
the original working
PW after it recovers.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Nonrevertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-521
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12
0 to 100
Detection mode
OAM Parameters
NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of
PWs is set to PW APS.
l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management >
PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
A-522
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
OAM Status
Detection Mode
Auto-Sensing
Auto-Sensing
Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval specified
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value AutoSensing is
recommended.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-523
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CV
CV
FFD
3.3
50
10
20
50
100
200
500
PW ID to be Received
Specifies the PW ID to be
received.
A-524
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
Slave Protection Pair.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Mode
Protection Group ID
Working PW ID
Protection PW ID
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PW ID
CoS Mapping
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-525
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
Sink
Connection Direction
Source
Sink
A-526
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Segment point
Endpoint
Segment and Endpoint
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-527
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
segment point
periodically sends
these cells.
A segment point
catches segment
AIS/RDI cells
only.
l End point: an end point
of an ATM link. It is
usually an edge point
on the ATM network.
Upon detecting a
fault, an end point
reports the
corresponding
alarms but does not
insert any AIS
cells.
An end point
catches end AIS/
RDI cells only.
l Segment and endpoint:
a segment-end point,
or an edge point of a
segment and an end.
Upon detecting a
fault, a segmentend point reports
the corresponding
alarms but does not
insert any AIS
cells.
A segment-end
point catches the
AIS/RDI cells of a
segment and an
end.
Navigation Path
1.
A-528
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
OAM Management from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
2.
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
Sink
Connection Direction
Source
Sink
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-529
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
A-530
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CC Activate Flag
Deactivate
l Specifies the CC
activation flag.
Source activate
Sink activate
Source + sink activate
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-531
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
Sink
Connection Direction
Source
Sink
A-532
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Loopback Point NE
l Specifies the NE
where the loopback
point is located.
l Before an end-to-end
LB test, you need to set
end points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the end points.
l Before a segment-tosegment LB test, you
need to set segment
points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the segment
points.
Test Result
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Country Code
(Hexadecimal Code)
00 00
Network Code
(Hexadecimal Code)
00 01
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-533
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Code (Hexadecimal
Code)
00 30 00 04 00 00 00 00 00
00 00
l Displays or specifies
the NE code of the
ATM service. The
value is 11 bytes in
length.
l The default NE code
can be used if it is
unique on the network.
l NE code and NE ID are
associated. Therefore,
each NE on the
network has a unique
NE code.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Clock > Frequency Selection Mode from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
A-534
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Physical Synchronization
Physical Synchronization
PTP Synchronization
NOTE
l For equipment that
receives an external
clock, set this parameter
to Physical
Synchronization.
l For a 1588 ACR client
or a PTP clock used for
frequency
synchronization, set this
parameter to PTP
Synchronization.
l For IF boards, only
Physical
Synchronization is
supported.
A-535
A Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.
2.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
2Mbit/s
2Mbit/s
2MHz
l This parameter
indicates the type of
the external clock
source signal.
l This parameter is set
according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.
A-536
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SA4 to SA8
SA4
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-537
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Affiliated Subnet
0 to 255
A-538
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Status
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-539
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
that the S1 byte is not
used. The NE selects
and switches a clock
source only according
to the sequence
specified in the
priority table. The
clock source of the
highest priority is used
as the clock source to
be traced.
l After the SSM
protocol is stopped,
each NE performs the
protection switching
on the clock according
to the preset priority
table of the clock
source only when the
clock source of a
higher priority is lost.
Clock Source
A-540
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source ID
(None)
(None)
1 to 15
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-541
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
Configuration Quality
Unknown
Synchronization Quality
Automatic Extraction
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
A-542
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Manual Setting of 0
Quality Level
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-543
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812 Local
Clock and
synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS): lower
than the quality level
of the local exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812 but
higher than the quality
level of the clock
signal of the SETS.
l SETS Clock: the clock
signal of the SETS.
l Between synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS) and
quality unavailable:
lower than the quality
level of the clock
signal of the SETS but
higher than the quality
level unavailable in the
synchronous timing
source.
Navigation Path
A-544
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Line Port
l This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Enabled
Control Status
Enabled
Disabled
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-545
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Line Port
l This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Enabled
Enabled Status
Enabled
Disabled
Navigation Path
1.
A-546
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Switching.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
2.
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
Auto-Revertive
Auto-Revertive
Non-Revertive
l Correct setting of
Clock Source
Switching Condition
ensures the reliability
of the clock source
switching. To improve
the clock quality,
select AutoRevertive. Otherwise,
to prevent jitter of the
clock, generally, it is
recommended that you
set this parameter to
Non-Revertive.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-547
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
0 to 12
l This parameter
specifies the duration
from the time when the
clock source
restoration is detected
to the time when the
clock source switching
is triggered. This
parameter is used to
avoid frequent
switching of the clock
source due to
instability of the clock
source state within a
short time.
l This parameter is valid
only when Higher
Priority Clock
Source Reversion
Mode is set to AutoRevertive.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching.
2.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
Effective Status
Valid
Invalid
A-548
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Lock Status
Lock
l This parameter
specifies the locking
status of the clock
source in the priority
table.
Unlock
Switching Status
Normal
Manual Switching
Forced Switching
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.
2.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
Clock Source
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-549
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Yes
No
No
RLOS,RLOF,OOF/
RLOC Alarms
Generated
Yes
Yes
CV Threshold-Crossing
Generated
CV Threshold
B2-EXC Alarm
Generated
Yes
No
No
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
2M Phase-Locked
Source Number
2Mbit/s
2Mbit/s
l This parameter
specifies the mode of
the output clock.
2MHz
SA4 to SA8
ALL
ALL
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-551
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Threshold Disabled
Threshold Disabled
l This parameter
specifies the lowest
quality of the output
clock. If the clock
quality is lower than
the value of this
parameter, it indicates
that the external clock
source does not output
any clock signal.
No Failure Condition
No Failure Condition
AIS
LOF
AIS OR LOF
l This parameter
specifies the failure
condition of the 2
Mbit/s phase-locked
clock source.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Fail Action
2M Output S1 Byte
Unavailable
Send AIS
A-552
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
NE Clock Working
Mode
S1 Byte Synchronization
Quality Information
S1 Byte Synchronous
Source
Synchronous Source
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-553
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
A-554
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Clock > ACR Clock from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CES Service
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-555
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Domain
Clock Port
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Domain
Board
Available Port
A-556
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected Port
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-557
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
NE Name
Work Mode
OC
BC
l An NE in OC mode
supports only one PTP
port and is used at the
network edge.
BC
l An NE in BC mode
supports multiple PTP
ports and is used as an
intermediate network
node.
SLAVE_ONLY
SLAVE_ONLY
NON_SLAVE_ONLY
NON_SLAVE_ONLY
A-558
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time Adjusting
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Fully Multicasted
Fully Multicasted
Partially Multicasted
l If Packet Multicast
Mode is set to Fully
Multicasted, SYNC,
ANNOUNCE, and
DELAY packets are
multicast.
l If Packet Multicast
Mode is set to
Partially
Multicasted, SYNC
and ANNOUNCE
packets are multicast
but DELAY packets
are unicast.
l Generally, the value
Fully Multicasted is
recommended.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-559
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NMEA
UBX
UBX
l NMEA is an
international protocol
and the commonest
value.
l UBX is a protocol
defined by the
ULBOX company.
l This parameter takes
effect when Interface
Protocol of the
external time port is
1PPS+Time.
l This parameter can be
set but does not take
effect when Interface
Protocol of the
external time port is
DCLS.
Local Clock Source No
A-560
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Ingress of Current
Master Clock
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-561
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Single/Double Step
Mode
A-562
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
1-4094
l Specifies or displays
the VLAN ID carried
by PTP packets that
travel through a PTP
port.
l If a Layer 2 network
exists between two
NEs interworking the
PTP protocol, you
need to set a VLAN ID
for PTP packets based
on the situation of the
Layer 2 network to
ensure that the Layer 2
network transparently
transmits the PTP
packets.
PTP Packet
Encapsulation Format
PTPETH
PTPETH
PTPIP
l If Layer 2
encapsulation needs to
be performed for PTP
packets, set this
parameter to
PTPETH.
l If IP encapsulation
needs to be performed
for PTP packets, set
this parameter to
PTPIP.
l This parameter does
not take effect for
microwave interfaces.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-563
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Status
MASTER+SLAVE
MASTER+SLAVE
l Specifies or displays
the default status of a
PTP port.
MASTER
SLAVE
l MASTER: When a
clock port is in
MASTER state, it
provides the clock
source to the
downstream
equipment.
l SLAVE: When a port
is in SLAVE state, it
functions as the
downstream port to
receive the clock
information from its
upstream port.
l MASTER+SLAVE:
When a port is in
MASTER+SLAVE
state, it receives clock
information from its
upstream port and
functions as a clock
source for its
downstream port.
l The default value is
recommended.
A-564
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
1-0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FF
Enable ACR
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-565
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
P/E Mode
P2P
P2P
E2E
l if the opposite NE is a
P2P TC NE, set this
parameter to P2P.
l If the opposite NE is an
OC/BC node, set this
parameter to P2P.
SYNC Packet Period(s)
A-566
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ANNOUNCE Packet
Period(s)
ANNOUNCE Packet
Timeout Coefficient
2-10
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Warp Direction
Negative
Positive
l Specifies the
transmission direction
of PTP packets.
Positive
l Specifies whether
asymmetric delay
compensation is
performed in the
transmit direction or
receive direction.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-567
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Warp Mode
Length
Length
l Specifies the
transmission delay
compensation mode.
Time
Wrap Time(ns)
A-568
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Synchronization Attribute from the
Function Tree.
2.
3.
Click New.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
Specifies boards to
support PTP clocks.
Available Port
Selected Port
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function
Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
Clock Subnet
0-255
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-569
A Parameters Description
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration from the Function
Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name
0-255
187
Time Precision
0-255
254
INTERNAL_OSCILLATOR
INTERNAL_OSCILLATOR
ATOMIC_CLOCK
GPS
TERRESTRIAL_RADIO
PTP
NTP
HAND_SET
OTHER
Clock Source Priority 1
0-255
128
A-570
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
0-255
128
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > External Time Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Interface Mode
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-571
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Egress
Egress
Ingress
DCLS
DCLS
1PPS+Time
l Specifies or displays
the time transmission
mode of the external
time port.
l Set this parameter
according to the
parameter setting of
the external
equipment.
RS422
interface Level
RS422
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
A-572
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > External Time Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
0-255
187
Time Precision
0-255
254
ATOMIC_CLOCK
GPS
INTERNAL_OSCILLATOR
128
TERRESTRIAL_RADIO
PTP
NTP
HAND_SET
OTHER
INTERNAL_OSCILLATOR
Clock Source Priority 1
0-255
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-573
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
0-255
128
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
A-574
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Clock > PTP Clock > External Time Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmitting Direction
Egress
Length
l Specifies the
transmission delay
compensation mode.
Ingress
Transmitting Distance
Mode
Length
Time
0-300
Transmitting Time(ns)
0-1350
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-575
A Parameters Description
Related Concepts
3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
A-576
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
1 to 9
Dialling Mode
Pulse
Dual-Tone
Frequency
Conference Call
Dual-Tone
Frequency
888
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-577
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Phone 1
100 to 99999999
101
Available
Orderwire Port
Selected
Orderwire Port
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
A-578
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Orderwire
Occupied Bytes
E1
E1
E2
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Data
Path
Number
Data Channel 1
Data Channel 2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-579
A Parameters Description
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Overhead Byte
SERIAL1 to
SERIAL4
SERIAL1
Broadcast Data
Source
No Data
Available
Broadcast Data
Sink
Selected Broadcast
Data Sink
A-580
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Navigation Path
Select the AUX logical board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface
from the Function Tree.
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
Relay Control
Mode
Auto Control
Auto Control
Manual Control
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-581
A Parameters Description
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
Path Name
Using Status
Unused
Unused
Used
Alarm Mode
Alarm Severity
Critical Alarm
Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
Path Name
Use or Not
Unused
Unused
Used
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
Monitor Status
A-582
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A Parameters Description
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Temperature
Upper Threshold
(Deg.C)
Temperature
Lower Threshold
(Deg.C)
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Alarm Severity
Critical Alarm
Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Warning Alarm
CSK-1
CSK-1
Alarm Output
Channel
CSK-2
CSK-3
CSK-4
Related Concepts
3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
A-583
Loopback Type
Remarks
SL1D
l Inloops at E1 tributary
ports
l Outloops at E1 tributary
ports
EM4T/EM4F/EM6X
EM6T/EM6F
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
B-1
Board
Loopback Type
Remarks
EFP8
IF1
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports
IFU2/ISU2/IFX2/ISX2
B-2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CSTA
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
PROG
On (green)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C-1
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)
SYNC
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (red)
Off
On (red)
Off
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
C-2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
PROG
On (green)
On (red)
SYNC
SRV
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
C-3
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
Off
PROG
On (green)
On (red)
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
C-4
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
C Indicators of Boards
State
Meaning
Off
On or blinking (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
On or blinking (yellow)
Off
On (red)
Off
On (red)
Off
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
PROG
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C-5
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
On (green)
On (red)
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
C-6
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
On or blinking (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT2
On or blinking (yellow)
Off
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
RMT
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
On (yellow)
On (yellow)
C-7
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
ACT
State
Meaning
Off
On (green)
Off
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
C-8
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
RMT
ACT
C Indicators of Boards
State
Meaning
Blinks on (yellow)
and off at 300 ms
intervals
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
LINK
ODU
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
C-9
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
On (red)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
Off
STAT
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
SRV
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
LINK
ODU
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Off
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C-11
C Indicators of Boards
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
On (red)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
Off
STAT
LINK
ODU
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)
RMT
C-12
On (yellow)
On (yellow)
Off
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT
On (green)
Off
l In an unprotected system,
the board is not activated.
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
PROG
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C-13
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)
LINK1a
LINK2a
Off
On (green)
Blinking (yellow)
Off
On (green)
Flashing (green)
Off
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical ports.
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
PROG
C-14
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
C Indicators of Boards
State
Meaning
On (green)
On (red)
SRV
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
C-15
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
LOS1
On (red)
Off
On (red)
Off
LOS2
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
SRV
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
C-16
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
C Indicators of Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
Off
SRV
On (green)
On (red)
On (yellow)
Off
Status
Description
PWRA
On (green)
Off
On (green)
Off
PWRB
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Indicator
State
Meaning
FAN
On (green)
On (red)
Off
C-17
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
Weight (kg)
CSTA
1.08 kg
< 13.6 W
CSHA
1.11 kg
< 18.0 W
CSHB
1.16 kg
< 22.7 W
CSHC
1.13 kg
< 19.6 W
CSHD
1.00 kg
< 32.2 W
IF1
0.72 kg
< 12.0 W
IFU2
0.79 kg
< 23.0 W
IFX2
0.80 kg
< 33.0 W
ISU2
0.60 kg
< 22.0 W
ISX2
0.60 kg
< 23.0 W
EM6T
0.37 kg
< 10.4 W
EM6F
0.40 kg
< 11.3 W
EFP8
0.60 kg
< 13.5 W
SL1D
0.30 kg
< 3.4 W
ML1
0.45 kg
< 7.0 W
MD1
0.50 kg
< 12.2 W
SP3S
0.50 kg
< 5.7 W
D-1
Board
Weight (kg)
SP3D
0.64 kg
< 9.6 W
PIU
0.12 kg
< 0.5 W
FAN
0.20 kg
Empty chassis
(with only the
backplane)
D-2
2.36 kg
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
Glossary
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-1
E Glossary
E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
1U
The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
A
ABR
ACAP
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACL
adaptive modulation
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a highefficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts
the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the
link that carries high-priority services.
ADC
add/drop multiplexer
Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/
or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Address Resolution
Protocol
adjacent channel
alternate polarization
ADM
administrative unit
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
AF
aggregation
E-2
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
AIS
E Glossary
alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network
Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the
details of the alarm.
alarm cascading
Alarm Filtering
An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on
the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm
information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or
stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm suppression
A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
AM
analog to digital
converter
An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The
reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS
ARP
assured forwarding
One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
Asynchronous
Transfer Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM
ATM PVC
ATPC
attenuator
A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
AU
automatic protection
switching
automatic transmit
power control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
at the receiver
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-3
E Glossary
B
backward defect
indication
When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)
to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth
A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power
control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one
or more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic
and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio
equipment, and the antenna.
basic input/output
system
BDI
BE
BER
best effort
A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
binding strap
The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent
polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIOS
BIP
bit error
Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BPDU
E-4
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast
BSC
BTS
buffer
A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking to
compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data
can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a
program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will
be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store
an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.
C
cable tie
cable tray
N/A
cable trough
N/A
CAR
CBR
CBS
CC
CCC
CCDP
CCM
CE
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
CES
CF
CGMP
channel
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-5
E Glossary
CIR
circuit emulation
service
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
Cisco Group
Management Protocol
N/A
CIST
CIST root
clock tracing
The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
co-channel dual
polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength
division multiplexing
colored packet
A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate
conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
common and internal
spanning tree
The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical
continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP
to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash
Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
concatenation
A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
connectivity check
Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
E-6
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check
message
corrugated pipe
CPU
CRC
cross polarization
interference
cancellation
A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
customer edge
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM
cyclic redundancy
check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
data communication
network
data communications
channel
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
Datagram
DC
DC-C
DC-C
DC-C
DC-I
DC-return common
(with ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return common
(with ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-7
E Glossary
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
ground)
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC
DCN
DDF
DDN
DE
differentiated services
A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series
of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of perhop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning
functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
differentiated services
code point
A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply
differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ
policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and
other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffServ
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution
frame
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital modulation
A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the
carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the
information can be transmitted by the carrier.
direct current
Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible
A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports
the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic
exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the
case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Distance Vector
Multicast Routing
Protocol
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
datagrams with its neighbors.
DS boundary node
DS domain
DS interior node
DS node
A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP
E-8
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
DVMRP
E
E-Aggr
E-LAN
E-Line
E-Tree
See Ethernet-tree
EBS
ECC
EF
electromagnetic
compatibility
electromagnetic
interference
electrostatic discharge
The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded control
channel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC
EMI
Engineering label
EPL
EPLAN
equalization
ERPS
ESD
ESD jack
Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet
Ethernet
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-9
E Glossary
Ethernet aggregation
Ethernet LAN
Ethernet line
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet ring
protection switching
Ethernet virtual
private LAN service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet virtual
private line
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet-tree
ETS
ETSI
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
EVPL
EVPLAN
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching
expansion
Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, thus
expanding the capacity of the storage system.
expedited forwarding
The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
E-10
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
F
failure
If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
fast Ethernet
Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FD
FDI
FE
FEC
FFD
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmable
gate array
FIFO
A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Forced switch
For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward defect
indication
Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the
LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the
defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error
correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-11
E Glossary
Forwarding plane
Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can
be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA
fragment
Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.
Fragmentation
Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium
that cannot support the original size of the packet.
frame
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.
frequency diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP
full-duplex
G
gateway network
element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
the NM application layer
GE
generic framing
procedure
A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
standardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
GFP
gigabit Ethernet
GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning
System
GNE
GPS
E-12
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS
GUI
guide rail
H
HA
half-duplex
HDLC
hierarchical quality of
service
A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according
to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability
The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer
of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by
adding a trailer and a header.
In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower
order path layers.
Hold priority
The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the
tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hop
A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot standby
HP
HQoS
HSB
HSDPA
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-13
E Glossary
HSM
HTB
hybrid radio
The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports
the AM function.
I
ICMP
IDU
IEC
IEEE
IETF
IF
IGMP
IGMP snooping
IMA
indoor unit
Inloop
A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect
unit.
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
Intermediate System
The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate
routes.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System
datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.
routing protocol
internal spanning tree
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.
International
Organization for
Standardization
E-14
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
International
Telecommunication
UnionTelecommunication
Standardization Sector
Internet Control
Message Protocol
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering
Task Force
Internet Group
Management Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet protocol
version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet protocol
version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
inverse multiplexing
over ATM
The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher
bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is
referred to as an IMA group.
IP
IPV6
IPv6
IS-IS
ISO
IST
ITU-T
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-15
E Glossary
J
Jitter
Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L
L2VPN
Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
LACP
LAG
LAN
LAN
LAPS
Laser
A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer 2 switch
A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual private A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet
network
switched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB
See loopback
LCAS
LCT
line rate
The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
E-16
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity
adjustment scheme
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Protection
Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,
the link protection should be provided.
LMSP
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching
When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
LOF
LOM
loss of multiframe
loopback
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP
LOS
Loss Of Frame
loss of pointer
Loss Of Signal
Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
LP
LPT
LSP
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-17
E Glossary
LSR
M
MA
MAC
MAC
MADM
main topology
A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).
The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine
interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms
of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic
network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
maintenance
association
maintenance
association end point
A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service
Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an
end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance
Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenance domain
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point
management
information base
manual switch
Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
unit
depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
MBS
MCF
MD
MDI
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
E-18
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
medium dependent
interface
The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media
transmission.
MEP
MEP
message
communication
function
MIB
MIP
mounting ear
A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP
MPID
MPLS
MPLS L2VPN
The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In
this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of
different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM
The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault
detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and
relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CRLSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.
In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-19
E Glossary
MPLS TE tunnel
MS
MSP
MSTP
MTBF
MTTR
MTU
Multicast
A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section
The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex section
protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
multiprotocol label
switching traffic
engineering
N/A
N
N+1 protection
A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
E-20
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
network element
E Glossary
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point
access OSI network services.
network to network
interface
next hop
The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network
on its journey to its final destination.
NLP
NMS
NNI
node
A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,
one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for
one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.
Node Protection
A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to
protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to
protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR.
non-gateway network
element
non-GNE
NSAP
NSF
O
OAM
ODF
ODU
OM
One-to-One Backup
A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected
tunnel at a PLR.
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-21
E Glossary
Open Systems
Interconnection
operation,
administration and
maintenance
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source
(or a detector).+
optical distribution
frame
orderwire
OSI
OSPF
outdoor unit
Outloop
A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without
changing the structure of the signals.
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P
packet switched
network
Packing case
Path
A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end
of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is
a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the
network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between
a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet
loss ratio or other aspects.
PBS
PCB
E-22
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
PCI bus
PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit
for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PDH
PDU
PE
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed
information rate.
penultimate hop
popping
per-hop behavior
PHB
PHP
PIR
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
polarization
A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Power box
A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
PPP
PQ
PRBS
PRC
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-23
E Glossary
priority queue
An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three
operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority
2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return
it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): look
at the element with highest priority without removing it
protection ground
cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path
provider edge
A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and
exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a
PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and
the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence
values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire
An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes
edge-to-edge
of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched
Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
PSN
PTN
PW
PWE3
Q
QinQ
A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag
of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.
The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the
carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS
QPSK
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
keying
the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
E-24
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
quality of service
E Glossary
R
radio frequency
radio network
controller
A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the
radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
RDI
Received Signal
Strength Indicator
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
Receiver Sensitivity
RED
Reed-Solomon-Code
A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of
errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission
errors at the receiver site.
REI
remote defect
indication
A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal
detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are
two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream
LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is
sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-25
E Glossary
Resource Reservation
Protocol
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure
A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end
transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end
to slow down the transmission rate.
RF
RFC
RIP
RMON
RMON
RNC
Root alarm
An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route
A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route table
A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination
address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to
the designated account according to the information set in the route table.
Routing Information
Protocol
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
routing table
A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RSL
RSSI
RSTP
RSVP
RTN
S
SD
SDH
SEMF
E-26
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the
forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization
(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement
as a whole or partially.
Service Level
Agreement *
SES
Setup Priority
The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the
resources required by other backup tunnels.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction).
SF
SFP
side trough
The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the
cabinet.
signal cable
Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal fail
A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network
Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
simplex
SLA
SLA*
Slicing
small form-factor
pluggable
SNC
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-27
E Glossary
SNCP
SNMP
SNR
space diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSM
Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN
information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STM
STM-1
STM-N
STP
sub-network
Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and
closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a
topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network
planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space
can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on
the equipments under their management.
subnet mask
The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the
association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
protection
subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
SVC
switch
To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This
behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.
E-28
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message
Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff), and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronous digital
hierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable
for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses
synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous
equipment
management function
The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into
object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the
SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably
conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized
to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
synchronous transport A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH.
See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64.
module of order N
T
tail drop
A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,
packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as
TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,
thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are
dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.
Tail drop
A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
TCI
TCP
TDM
TE
TEDB
Telecommunication
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-29
E Glossary
TIM
time division
multiplexing
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
time to live
A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TMN
ToS priority
A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS
traffic engineering
A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
traffic engineering
database
TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know
the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses
the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain
some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved
bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather
important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and
generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS
TE network.
Traffic shaping
Transmission Control
Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tributary protection
switch
trTCM
TTL
TU
tributary unit
Tunnel
A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
E-30
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak
Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated
burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the
PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or
doesn't exceed the CIR.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U
U-VLAN
A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.
Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS
unavailable second
UBR
UDP
underfloor cabling
The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI
unicast
upload
User Datagram
Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V
V-UNI
One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR
VC
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-31
E Glossary
VCC
VCG
VCI
VCTRUNK
A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board
virtual channel
connection
The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channel
identifier
A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.
virtual concatenation
group
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
virtual concatenation link
virtual container
The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists
of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s.
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
virtual path the cell belongs.
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual route forward
VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual
routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,
performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on
the device.
virtual user-network
interface
VLAN
voice over IP
An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP
VPI
VPLS
VPN
VRF
E-32
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E Glossary
W
wait to restore
The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN
Web LCT
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection
synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
weighted round Robin N/A
WFQ
A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
winding pipe
WRED
WRR
WTR
X
XPIC
Issue 02 (2011-01-20)
E-33